Date post: | 10-Apr-2015 |
Category: |
Documents |
Upload: | yolanda-pena |
View: | 925 times |
Download: | 34 times |
1INTRODUCTION, TOOLS, ROOM CHECK
UNPACK, TRANSPORT, MOUNT
INSTALLATION
SETTING--TO--WORK
PERFORMANCE CHECKS
HANDOVER PREPARATION
OPTIONS
CABLING & EARTHING DIAGRAMS
RECORD OF MEASURED DATA
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11Manual Order No. 4512 984 263814512 983 06211 0.1
BuckyDiagnost TS
SYSTEM MANUALINSTALLATION
PHILIPSPHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS
DMC HamburgReproduction in whole or part of this manual is prohibited withoutthe written consent of the copyright owner. Use of the informationcontained herein, in any form and/or by any means whatsoeveris strictly reserved for Philips and its licensees. Use of thismanual by unauthorised persons is strictly prohibited.
Printed in HamburgFederal Republic of Germany
(04.0) 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TS
4512 983 06211 (04.0) 0.2 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06211
List of pages and modules (LOPAM)
4512 980 54001 Binder
Transparent plastic sheet
4512 983 06211 (TITLE) 0.1 (04.0)
4512 983 06211 (LOPAM) 0.2 (04.0)
4512 983 06211 (LOPAM) 0.3 (04.0)
4512 983 06211 (LOPAM) 0.4 (04.0)
SYSTEM MANUAL INSTALLATION
Section 1: Introduction, Tools, Quick room check
4512 983 06231 Tools 1-1 (02.0)4512 983 06241 Room Preparation 1-1 (02.0)
Section 2: Unpack, Transport, Mount
4512 983 06251 Unpack, Transport, Mount 2-1 (02.0)Packing list
Section 3: Installation
4512 983 06261 Sequence of installation 3-1 (04.0)4512 983 06271 Mounting the rails 3-1 (04.0)
4512 982 0014. Mechanical dimensions, wall stand left Z--1.1 (02.0)4512 982 0014. Mechanical dimensions, wall stand right Z--1.2 (02.0)4512 982 0014. Connecting surface / floor fixing Z--5.1 (02.0)4512 982 0014. Connecting surface / floor fixing, fixed table version Z--5.2 (02.0)
4512 983 06281 Installation of the bucky table 3-1 (02.0)4512 983 06291 OP 30 SP -- Control desk 3-1 (03.0)
4512 982 0091. OP 30 SP -- Contol desk stand alone, Floor plate Z--3 (02.0)4512 982 0091. OP 30 SP -- Template for control desk, wall mounted version Z--4 (02.0)
4512 983 06301 OP 30 SP -- Mechanical Installation 3-1 (03.0)4512 982 0091. OP 30 SP -- Power mains adapt. 800VA, Mechanical dimens.Z--1.3 (02.0)4512 982 0091. OP 30 SP -- Power mains adaptation 800VA, Location plan Z--1.4 (02.0)4512 982 0091. OP 30 SP -- Basement, Fixation for earth quake protection Z--2.1 (02.0)4512 982 0091. OP 30 SP -- Dimension wall support Z--2.2 (02.0)
4512 983 06311 OP 30 SP -- Cable connections 3-1 (02.0)4512 983 06321 OP 30 SP -- Stator Connection at Generator Side 3-1 (02.0)4512 983 06331 OP 30 SP -- H.T. - Unit 3-1 (03.0)
4512 983 06221 OP 30 SP -- Mains circuit Z1--1 (01.0)4512 982 0014. Earthing diagram Z--7.2 (02.0)
4512 983 05971 OP -- Installation wall junction box 3-1 (02.0)4512 982 0099. OP -- Connection of generator Z--6.1 (01.0)4512 982 0099. OP -- Connection of generator with Power Distribution Unit Z--6.2 (01.0)
4512 983 05991 OP -- Installation control desk 3-1 (03.0)4512 982 0099. OP -- Oparating panel, Mechanical dimensions Z--1.3 (01.0)4512 983 05521 OP -- Operating panel C Z1--11.1 (02.0)4512 983 05511 OP -- Backpanel EZ, Basis rack -2 Z Z2--5.2 (b/02.0)
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TS
4512 983 06211 (04.0) 0.3 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06211
Section 3: Installation (continued)
4512 983 05981 OP -- Preparatory work 3-1 (02.0)4512 983 06081 OP RAD -- Electrical connection 3-1 (02.1)
4512 983 05751 Block diagram Expansions Z1--1.2 (97.0)4512 983 05761 Power supply Z1--2.1 (97.0)4512 983 05951 Power supply for digital DIAGNOST Z1--2.1.1(02.0)4512 983 05941 Power supply with mains transformer Z1--2.2 (97.1)4512 983 05961 Power supply with mains transformer for digital DIAGNOST Z1--2.2.1(02.0)4512 983 05531 Basic interface Z1--6 (02.0)4512 983 05541 Tube extension overview Z1--14.1 (b/98.0)4512 983 05551 WG / 1WG / 2WG, Tube extension Z1--14.2 (c/97.1)4512 983 05571 WA/1WA/2WA adapter 4 auxil. units Z1--15.1 (97.0)4512 983 05511 Backpanel EZ, Basis rack-2 Z Z2--5.2 (b/02.0)
4512 983 06091 OP RAD -- Hardware programming 3-1 (02.0)
Section 4: Setting-to-work
4512 983 06341 Setting to work 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 06351 Adjustment procedure for tomo 4-1 (02.0)
4512 983 06141 Power supply, tomo version Z1--2.1 (99.0)4512 983 06361 Installation of tomo bar parking frame 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 06371 Final installation work 4-1 (04.0)
4512 983 06151 Labeling 2Z--10 (03.0)4512 983 04441 bD TH2 -- Collimator Compliance Test 9-1 (03.0)
4512 983 06381 OP 30 SP -- Switch On the System 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 06391 OP 30 SP -- Tube Adjustment 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 06401 OP 30 SP -- Final installation work 4-1 (04.0)
4512 983 06201 OP 30 SP -- Labeling 2Z--10 (04.0)4512 983 06001 OP -- Switch-ON 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 06101 OP RAD -- Software XRGSCOPE 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 06111 OP RAD -- Configuration part 1 4-1 (02.0)
4512 983 05751 Block diagram expansions Z1--1.2 (97.0)4512 983 05571 WA/1WA/2WA adapter 4 auxil. units Z1--15.1 (97.0)4512 983 05591 RGDV programming 2Z--2.0 (01.0)4512 983 05611 RGDV programming: example 2 2Z--2.2 (a/01.0)4512 983 05631 RGDV programming: example 4 2Z--2.4 (a/01.0)4512 983 05641 RGDV programming: example 5 2Z--2.5 (a/01.0)4512 983 05651 RGDV programming: example 6 2Z--2.6 (01.0)4512 983 05671 RGDV programming: example 8 2Z--2.8 (01.0)4512 983 05681 RGDV programming: example 9 2Z--2.9 (01.0)4512 983 05691 RGDV programming: example 10 2Z--2.10 (01.0)
4512 983 06121 OP RAD -- Configuration part 2 4-1 (02.0)4512 983 05571 WA/1WA/2WA adapter 4 auxil. units Z1--15.1 (97.0)4512 983 05741 WA/WB/WP Cabinet wiring: Decade adapter 4 auxil. units Z2--15.1 (97.0)4512 983 05591 RGDV programming 2Z--2.0 (01.0)4512 983 05611 RGDV programming: example 2 2Z--2.2 (a/01.0)4512 983 05631 RGDV programming: example 4 2Z--2.4 (a/01.0)4512 983 05641 RGDV programming: example 5 2Z--2.5 (a/01.0)4512 983 05651 RGDV programming: example 6 2Z--2.6 (01.0)4512 983 05671 RGDV programming: example 8 2Z--2.8 (01.0)4512 983 05681 RGDV programming: example 9 2Z--2.9 (01.0)4512 983 05691 RGDV programming: example 10 2Z--2.10 (01.0)4512 983 05721 List of characters 2Z--3 (97.0)4512 983 05771 Data sets of chambers 2Z--4 (97.0)4512 983 05731 Programming of device interfaces 2Z--5 (97.0)
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TS
4512 983 06211 (04.0) 0.4 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06211
Section 4: Setting-to-work (continued)
4512 983 06011 OP -- Labeling 4-1 (04.1)4512 983 02831 Labeling 2Z--10 (a/04.0)4512 983 05701 Labeling (R/F) 2Z--10 (a/02.0)4512 983 05831 Labeling (RAD) 2Z--10 (a/02.0)
4512 983 06021 OP -- Final installation work 4-1 (02.0)
Section 5: Performance checks
Section 6: Handover preparation
Section 7: Options
Section 8: Cabling & earthing diagrams
4512 982 0014. Connection diagram, standard version, OPTIMUS L 50 Z--6.1 (02.0)4512 982 0014. Connection diagram, tomo version, OPTIMUS L 50 Z--6.2 (02.0)4512 982 0014. Connection diagram, standard version, OP 30 single phase Z--6.3 (02.1)4512 982 0014. Earthing diagram, OPTIMUS L 50 Z--7.1 (02.0)4512 982 0014. Earthing diagram, OPTIMUS 30 single phase Z--7.2 (02.0)4512 983 06851 Legend for cabling diagram Z--50 (03.0)
Section 9: Record of measured data
CE CertificatesTest protocol factory
Section 10:
Section 11:
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Introduction, Tools, Room Check
(02.0) 1--1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06231
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
1-1...1-2 (02.0)
Tools
Contents
1. Tools 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1. Tools required 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06231
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Introduction, Tools, Room Check
(02.0)1--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06231
1. Tools
1.1. Tools required
Code no. Tool Generator
3 ∼ 1 ∼
4512 130 23901 Standard set of tools
4512 130 23921 Upgrade kit version 1 to version 2 of ceiling suspension liftingdevice
4512 130 23931 Distance tool for ceiling suspension rails
Ladder
Ruler 3 m
1312 503 60902 Grease, 25 gramms, type ISOFLEX, TOPAS NB 52 *
Loctite blue
Spirit Level
4535 986 15201 Dual laser alignment tool
4512 983 01041 Templates bucky DIAGNOST VE / VT
4512 983 02921 Template for bucky DIAGNOST TS
Spring balance 50 N
Mirror (about 30 x 40 cm)
Dose-meter (e.g. Dali or PMX III)
Oscilloscope, Tektroniks 486, or equivalent
Digital Multimeter
Non-invasive kVp meter
Digital mAs meter
Calculator
Mains resistance measuring instrument
ESD antistatic kit
2422 487 89772 Chip-ejector for service
25 mm aluminium for AMPLIMAT adjustment
PC with minimal MS Windows 3.1
Hardware key
8112 108 57929 Tomo phantom
Only for AEC purposes:
Sensitometer
Densitometer
25 or 20 mm AL test phantom
J
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Introduction, Tools, Room Check
4512--983--06241 (02.0) 1--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
1-1...1-4 (02.0)
Room Preparation
Contents
1. Dimension of Boxes 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1. bucky DIAGNOST TS 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. OPTIMUS 30 Single Phase (1 ~) 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3. OPTIMUS 80 (3 ~) 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4. bucky DIAGNOST wallstand 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5. Accessories 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6. PMA 800 Box 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Check List 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Dimension of Cable Ducts 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06241
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Introduction, Tools, Room Check bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)1--2 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06241
Room Preparation
1. Dimension of Boxes
1.1. bucky DIAGNOST TS
Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Gross weight(kg)
Net weight (kg)
265 89 190 750270 97 196 870
1.2. OPTIMUS 30 Single Phase (1 ∼)
Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Gross weight(kg)
Net weight (kg)
Generatorcabinet
445 360 550 56
Pedestral 44Packing 1090 610 710 120
1.3. OPTIMUS 80 (3 ∼)
Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Gross weight(kg)
Net weight (kg)
Cabinet 2120 720 860 220 180Generator 760 670 780 93 72
1.4. bucky DIAGNOST wallstand
Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Gross weight(kg)
Net weight (kg)
VE / VE2 2380 780 860 320 240
1.5. Accessories
Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Gross weight(kg)
Net weight (kg)
Accessories 920 620 780 60 47
1.6. PMA 800 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(only with OPTIMUS 30 single phase, is included in standard delivery)
Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Gross weight(kg)
Net weight (kg)
450 750 188 40500 800 300 60
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Introduction, Tools, Room Check
4512--983--06241 (02.0) 1--3 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
2. Check ListBefore the system is delivered, check the correctpreparations.
Pre check YES NOFree ways for delivery, check dimension of doors V V
Available tools to lift the ceiling suspension into the rails V V
Delivery note is in accordance with the questionnaire V V
Mechanical works YES NOCeiling rails are installed and aligned V V
Ceiling extension rails (optional order) are installed and aligned V V
Fixing holes for the bucky DIAGNOST TH / TH 2 V V
Fixing holes for the bucky DIAGNOST VE / VT, VE 2 / VT 2 V V
Electrical works YES NOMains installed V V
Cable ducts mounted V V
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Introduction, Tools, Room Check bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)1--4 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06241
3. Dimension of Cable DuctsFor thedifferent cables of the systemdifferent duct sizesare required.
The exact dimensions depend on the location.For exact room conditions see PRB.
J
PHILIPS
MEX
² 20 cm2 (3 ∼)
from hospital mains
² 40 cm2
² 20 cm2
² 60 cm2
² 40 cm2 (1 ∼)
² 20 cm2
(3 ∼)
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Unpack, Transport, Mount
(02.0) 2--1E 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06251
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
2--1...2--6 (02.0)
Unpack, Transport, Mount
Contents
1. Transport data 2--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1. Box dimensions 2--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2. Roadway 2--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Unpacking 2--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1. Removal of column base from column 2--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06251
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Unpack, Transport, Mount bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)2--2E 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06251
1. Transport data
1.1. Box dimensions
Weight
Gross 870 kg
Loading 816 kg
Net 750 kg
Dimension (L x W x H)
Box 270 cm x 97 cm x 196 cm
Pallet including loading 265 cm x 89 cm x 190 cm
Sub-pallet 140 cm x 89 cmSub-pallet 125 cm x 89 cm
1.2. Roadway
1 Roadway for the gross pallet
Crossing while moving min 170 cm width of the floor
2 Roadway for the sub--pallets
Crossing while moving min 115 cm width of the floor
min 170 cm width of roadwayfor gross pallet
min 115 cm
min 170 cm
870 kg
1
2
min 115 cm width of roadwayfor sub-pallet
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Unpack, Transport, Mount
(02.0) 2--3E 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06251
2. Unpacking
The following steps should be done by four persons.
Dismantle the box, remove the foil.
1. Remove the rails from the pallet.
NOTEFor transportation in insufficient rooms only. See 2.1
”Removal of column base from column”.
The column is supplied with an inserted counterweight.For transport, the counterweight and the transversearmare secured by a screw.
DWARNING
Do not remove these screws before the installation of
the tube arm.
Loosen the transport screws and safety belts on thepallet.
2. Remove the box with documents and distancetool from the column.
3. Set up the column.
-- 3a Move the column approximatly 15 cm to footdirection of the column.
-- 3b Turn the column base about 90 °.The column must be ratched in the cam.
-- 3c Lift up the column and place it.
DWARNING
Lay corrugated paper or something similar onto the
floor in the area where the column is to be moved.
Apply extreme care when handling the connection
field.
Unscrew the colored screws from the wooden carrieron which the column was positioned and remove it.
12
Documents anddistance tool
3a
3b3c
90 °
3
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Unpack, Transport, Mount bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)2--4E 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06251
4. Remove the box including cables from the table.
5. Remove the optional tomo devices from the pallet.
6. Remove the tube assembly from the pallet.
Remove the wooden items by removing the coloredscrews.
NOTEThe gross pallet can be splitted in two sub-pallets.
7. Remove the table from the pallet.
NOTEUse the shoulder straps. Do not lift the table by
means of the table top frame.
8. After unscrewing the sub-pallets from the palletyou get access to the table top. Remove the tabletop.
Dispose the package locally.
2.1. Removal of column base from column
This section is needed if the column is too large to enterthe X-ray room.
Tools required
Groofkey for column base PMS Code No. 4512 590 30362
Spring scale 200 N
Imbus Key 5 mm
Molykote DX PMS Code No. 4512 590 30321
Isotrophy alcohol
1. Dismantle base and column
1.1. Measure the breakaway force with a springscalewhen the column is in the the lock position.It shouldmeasure 110--150N. Place the hook ofthe spring scale on the screw head.
1.2. Repeat point 1.1, only column must be in freeposition. Should measure ≤ 60 N.
Cables
4
5
6
74
8
7
Table top deliveredin the pallet bottom
The pallet is deviable
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Unpack, Transport, Mount
(02.0) 2--5E 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06251
1.3. Release the pressure on the Beta grid (measurethe distance “X” between nut and screwhead.Dimensions needed by the adjustment ofreassembling).
1.4. Remove the 2 Imbus (M5) screws and plate(see P 3).
1.5. Loosen the safety screws (pos. 1) on the groovenut (see P6).
1.6. Remove groove nut and steelring.
1.7. Carefully remove column base from column:
Remove the teflon ring.
Clean it and grease it with Molykote DX.
X
M5M5
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Unpack, Transport, Mount bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)2--6E 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06251
1.8. Clean running surface and thread with Isopropylalcohol (see P4).For transport cover running surface and thread.
NoteThe stop pin pos. 3 can be removed in case of the
movement of the column is impaired. (This stop pin
will not be needed any longer.)
2. Assembling of column base and column
2.1. Grease the running surface of the column andcolumn with Molykote(PMS No. 4512 590 30321).
2.2. Insert the teflon ring.
2.3. Assemble the column base onto the column.(The column must be laid down whenassembling the column base. Take extremecare of thread.)
2.4. Assemble the steelring and groove nut.Hand-tighten the groove nut.
2.5. Rotate the column base for functional check.
2.6. Tighten groove nut until the inner steelring(spring) is compressed. Tighten safety screwspos. 1 (see P 6).
2.7. Adjust the beta grid (see P 2 and step 1.3).
2.8. Repeat step 1.1 and step 1.2.The breakaway force should measure 110--150Nm and the free running force should measure≤ 60 N.Adjust the force by loosening, resp. tighteningthe groove nut.
J
3
2
1
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TSInstallation
3--1(04.0)E 2002 Philips Medizin Systeme
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06261
Mechanical Installation
OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (3-1..3-4)
A B
1.0h 1.0h
A B
1.5 h 1.5 h
Installation of the bucky table
BuckyDiagn. TS -- (3-1..3-7)
2.5 h 2.5 h
A B
Sequence of installation
A BEngineerEngineer
Delivery at the customer’ssee at section 2
A B
2.5 h 2.5 h
Mounting the rails
BuckyDiagn. TS -- (3-1..3-8)
Control desk
OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (3-1..3-2)
Section 3
A B
1.0h 1.0h
A B
1.5 h 1.5 h
Cable connections
OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (3-1..3-5)
A B
2.5 h 2.5 h
Stator Connection at GeneratorSide
OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (3-1..3-3)
H.T. - Unit
OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (3-1..3-5)
A B
2.5 h 2.5 h
next page
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TSInstallation
3--2(04.0)E 2002 Philips Medizin Systeme
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06261
Hardware programming
OPTIMUS RAD -- (3-1..3-2)
Electrical connection
OPTIMUS RAD -- (3-1..3-12)
preceding page
Section 4
Installation of tomo bar parkingframe
BuckyDiagn. TS -- (4-1..4-2)
A B
1.0h 1.0h
A B
1.5 h 1.5 h
Setting to work
BuckyDiagn. TS -- (4-1..4-4)
2.5 h 2.5 h
A B
A BEngineerEngineer
A B
2.5 h 2.5 h
Adjustment procedure for tomo
BuckyDiagn. TS -- (4-1..4-11)
A B
1.0h 1.0h
A B
1.5 h 1.5 h
Final installation work
BuckyDiagn. TS -- (4-1..4-2)
A B
2.5 h 2.5 h
Switch On the System
OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (4-1..4-2)
A B
1.5 h 1.5 h
Final installation work
OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (4-1..4-2)
A B
2.5 h 2.5 h
next page
Tube Adjustment
OPTIMUS 30 SP -- (4-1..4-2)
Preparatory work
OPTIMUS -- (3-1..3-3)
A B
1.0h 1.0h
A B
1.5 h 1.5 h
Installation wall junction box
OPTIMUS -- (3-1)
Installation control desk
OPTIMUS -- (3-1..3-7)
A B
1.0h 1.0h
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TSInstallation
3--3(04.0)E 2002 Philips Medizin Systeme
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06261
Configuration part 2
OPTIMUS RAD -- (4-1..4-38)
Configuration part 1
OPTIMUS RAD -- (4-1..4-13)
preceding page
A B
1.0h 1.0h
A B
1.5 h 1.5 h
Labeling
OPTIMUS -- (4-1)
2.5 h 2.5 h
A B
A BEngineerEngineer
A B
2.5 h 2.5 h
Final installation work
OPTIMUS -- (4-1)
Software XRGSCOPE
OPTIMUS RAD -- (4-1..4-5)
A B
1.0h 1.0h
Switch-ON
OPTIMUS -- (4-1)
A B
1.0h 1.0h
J
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation BuckyDiagnost TS
(04.0) 3-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06271
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
3-1...3-8 (04.0)
Z-1.1 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0014.Z-1.2 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0014.Z-5.1 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0014.Z-5.2 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0014.
Mounting the rails
Contents
1. Mounting the rails 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tomo option only 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coarse Adjustment Tomo option only 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1. Insertion of column to long rail 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Installation of tube arm 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3. Final alignment of the column (tomo only) 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06271
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TS Installation
(04.0)3--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06271
1. Mounting the rails
DWARNING
Before starting, refer to your planning room layout!
(see PRB)
Assemble main rail.Depending on the installation of the bucky wallstand(right or left), place the extension rail right or lefthandside to the main rail (see Z-1.1, Z-1.2, Z-5.1 andZ-5.2).Insert the screw (suppliedwith system) with awasherand tighten with a spanner.
Tomo option only
Loosen the4 screws of the tomoswitch rail (1) and theend switch cams (2) and remove them.
Place the main rail parallel to the wall.Mark the 5 fixing points on the floor.Remove the rail.Drill the 8mmholes approximately 75mmdeep in themiddle of the marked area.Insert the 5 anchor dowels (suppliedwith system) intothe holes.Move the rail back to the installation position. Levelthe rail using a spirit level. Use the spacer ifnecessary.
Insert the screws (supplied with system) with thewashers and tighten with a spanner.
position of extensionrailfor bucky wallstand left
main rail
position of extensionrailfor bucky wallstand rightpencil
2
1
extension rail
min 314 mm
longitudinal axis tabletable position forbucky wallstand left
extension rail
min. 314 mm
longitudinal axis tabletable position forbucky wallstand right
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation BuckyDiagnost TS
(04.0) 3-3 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06271
Place the short rail parallel to the long rail.
Insert the tool (1 Rail distance tool) (supplied withsystem) to adjust the distance of the rails.Measure the distance of the rails using a rule.Mark the 2 fixing points on the floor.Remove the rail.Drill the 8mmholes approximately 75mmdeep in themiddle of the marked area.Insert the 2 anchor dowels (suppliedwith system) intothe holes.
Move the rail back to the installation position.Level the rail using a spirit level. Use the spacer ifnecessary.Insert the screw only with washer (supplied withsystem) to the opposite side where the column is tobe inserted.Tighten with a spanner.
Coarse Adjustment Tomo option only
Align front andback rails (2, 3) to same level using thespirit level. Use additional spacers if necessary.
DWARNING
For a good performance with the tomo option it is
essential to align front and back rail very precisely.
An alignment test will be made after installation of the
column.
Install the tomo switch rail (1).Insert both end switch cams (2).Insert screwswithwashers and tightenwithAllen key.
716 mm
1
shortlong
short
position forbucky wall stand left
extension rail
716 mm
1
shortlong
short
extension railposition forbucky wall stand right
2
3
2
1
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TS Installation
(04.0)3--4 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06271
1.1. Insertion of column to long rail
Remove buffer (1) from long rail.Insert the column into the rail system (2).
DWARNING
Apply extreme care when handling the ball bearings
and be careful not to damage the microswitches and
optical sensor B1 positioned in area 3.
Install buffer (1) to the rail system.Check the leveling of the column in both directionsusing a spirit level.Use the spacers if necessary.Check whether the column moves easily andsmoothly.Insert the second screw with washers into the shortrail.Tighten with a spanner.Mount the longitudinal center switch UB S17 (pos.3)standard, or position control switch assembly fortomo.
1.2. Installation of tube arm
Remove transport screw (2) from the counterweighton the front of the column.
DWARNING
Loosen transport screw (1) only and move the
complete block downwards.
Pull down the transverse arm and secure thecounterweight in its maximum top position byinserting transport screw (2).
1
2
2 3
1
2
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation BuckyDiagnost TS
(04.0) 3-5 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06271
Route the cables from the top of the column to the leftand right of the column (1).Open top cover (2) of the transversal tube arm byremoving the 4 screws 1 (Allen key, 2,5 mm).
DWARNING
Do not remove the screws (2) on top of the cover.
These screws are fixing the brake rail!
Place the pallet with transverse arm, including tubehousing and collimator, next to the column.Lift up the arm and insert it into column (3).
Insert stop screw (1).Remove the transport screw. The tube arm must beeasily movable in Z-direction.Connect the plug UFX38 (2).
1
2
3
2
11
11
1
52
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TS Installation
(04.0)3--6 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06271
Fasten the cable (4) by using a tie-wrap.Connect UFX38 (3)Install the cover of transverse arm (3).Install the front cover of transverse arm (5)(see previous page).
Install the cable support into the top of the column.
Install the wall junction box.
34
5
6
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation BuckyDiagnost TS
(04.0) 3-7 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06271
Route the cables on the column as shown in thefigure 1.Replace top cover of the transversal tube arm.Connect X20 / X22 on stand control UB1 for standardversion.Connect X20 / X21 / 22 / 23 / 24 on stand control UB1for tomo version.
Figure 1
** All three items, wall box, column cable support andtube arm, should be located as shown in figure 2(design and function, especially cable lenghts).*1 Location for ceiling suspension junction box. Thisbox is not included in the system. Please, order thisitem locally as an option.(PMS Artikel No. 9848 500 26201 ceiling suspensionbox for CS, this item is not included andmust beorderedoptionally).
NOTEMax. room height with ceiling suspension box = 3.0 m
Figure 2
UB1
*1 = 0.6 meter
**Wall box
Column cableSupport Tube arm
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TS Installation
(04.0)3--8 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06271
1.3. Final alignment of the column(tomo only)
Move the column to the left end position.
Check the alignment of the rails by moving thecolumn smoothly to the other end. The columnmust remain steadily upright over the whole length.If necessary, adjust the level of the front rail withspacers as described in Section “Mounting therails”.
The alignment can be done either with the spirit level orwith the following method:
Final adjustment
Apply a vertical line to the wall on the right-hand side,e.g. with a colored adhesive tape.Check the vertical alignment whilemoving the columnalong the rail.
If corrections should be necessary:
Add adjustment plates (0) under back (1) or front rail(2), or, for vertical correction (5),adjust the ball bearing (3). Three different holes areavailable. For easy access move the column to theleft or right end position.
If the column is not vertical (6), the correction can bemade with an eccentric ball bearing (4).
J
(6)
(5)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(1)
(0)
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Installation
(02.0) 3-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06281
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
3-1...3-7 (02.0)
Installation of the bucky table
Contents
1. Installation of bucky table 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Installation of Tomo pivot tower (tomo only) 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Installation of bucky-device extension (tomo only) 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Installation of position control switches (tomo only) 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Change position of the AMPLIMAT chamber from left to right side 3-7. . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06281
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)3--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06281
1. Installation of bucky table
NOTEFour (4) persons are necessary to lift the table.
The bucky table is supplied as a complete unit.
Remove thewooden blocks from the longitudinal sideof the pallet and place them at the rear of the pallet.
Remove the 4 transport screws and push themdown.
DWARNING
Do not lift the table by means of the tabletop frame
structure.
Insert the shoulder straps into the loops (1).
Lift up the table with the shoulder straps (1).
Remove the pallet and lower the table carefully.
Place the table with rear end towards the short rail.See room layout plan.
Insert screws (1) into the short rail and fit the tableto the rail.
Drill two 12 mm holes approximately 75mm deepfor screws (2).
Insert the 2 anchor dowels (supplied with system)into the holes.
Use the spacer if necessary.
Insert screws (2) supplied with system and washersand tighten with a spanner.
Level the table in both directions using a spirit level.
Use the spacer if necessary.
Insert screws (2) supplied with system andwashers and tighten with a spanner.
Install the foot-switch assembly.
1
1
2
1
table position forbucky wallstand right
2
1
table position forbucky wallstand left
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Installation
(02.0) 3-3 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06281
Remove the red screws (2) of the transport securingdevice of the tabletop carrier on both sides.
Remove the tie-wraps form the Bucky device (1)
i
Figure 1
Remove the cassette tray from the bucky.
Move the tabletop to its maximum front position (ifit is already mounted).
Loosen 2 screws at the rear (1).
Tilt the tabletop unit gently as shown in figure 2.
Secure the tabletop by fixing the lever (2) via thescrew (3).
Remove the tie-wraps (4) from the arm braces onboth sides (elevation table only).
Figure 2
DWARNING
Always remove cassette tray before opening the
tabletop. Tilting the tabletop with inserted tray will
cause damages to both table and cassette tray.
DWARNING
Tilting the table top beyond the upright position can
cause damages to the cover of the table base.
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)3--4 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06281
2. Installation of Tomo pivot tower(tomo only)
Position tomo pivot tower towards the correspondingmounting holes at the rear side of the table.
Thread cable W12 (laser cable) through the centerholes of table base and pivot tower base.
Insert 4 screws together with washers and toothlock washer (supplied with system) from the tableinside and mount the tomo pivot tower.
Close the tabletop.
Secure tabletop with the 2 screws at the rear.
Reinstall the cassette tray.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Installation
(02.0) 3-5 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06281
3. Installation of bucky-device extension(tomo only)
Mount the bucky-device extension and insert the4 screws with washers and tooth lock washers(supplied with system).
DWARNING
Do not support or level the free hanging end of the
bucky device extension while tightening the screws. It
will self-align to the film level in a slightly tilted position
when the screws are installed.
Tighten the screws.
4. Installation of position control switches(tomo only)
Pull corner iron with position control switches out of thecolumn base (they are parked in the column base fortransportation)
Insert screws with washers (supplied with system)into the column base and fit the position controlswitches as shown in (1).
Tighten screws with Allen key.
23
14
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)3--6 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06281
DWARNING
Move column with extreme care in order not to
damage or shear off the microswitches and the
magnetic sensor while passing the cams of the
tomo switch rail.
Adjust microswitches for center position andsafety end:
-- The microswitches (2) (center position) and (3)(safety limit switch) must trigger when passingtheir respective cams, as shown in the figurebelow.
Adjust the proper alignment of the magneticmeasuring sensor: Slowly move the columnalong the tomo switch rail:
-- the magnetic sensor B1 (1) (angle position)must not touch any of the cams. The distancebetweenmagnetic sensor (1) and cam should be 1 mm.
The functional test will be performed after power up (seeSection “Checking drive and position control switches”).The detection of any cam position regarding 40 ° / 20 °/ 8 ° is indicated with the red LED located as shown inthe figure.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Installation
(02.0) 3-7 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06281
5. Change position of the AMPLIMATchamber from left to right side
If the position of the bucky DIAGNOST TS must bechanged from left 1 to right 2 side thenamanipulationof the connector at the amplimat chamber isnecessary.
1 Remove the table top by removing the fourscrews.
Mark the center line of the table top to the frame(both sides).
Remove the table top.
2 Dismantle the anti-scatter grid by unscrewingthe four metal holders.
Remove the anti-scatter grid.
3 Dismantle the amplimat chamber by looseningthe two grub screws.
The wire assignment on the connector PH X1must be changed crosswise, the violett wire onX1:1 with the black wire on X1:3.
4 Place the measuring chamber in the newposition.
Fix with the two grub screws.
5 Re-install the anti-scatter grid.
Fix it.
6 Re-install the table cover in new position.
Fix the cover.
J
1
2
Left handversion
Right handversion
1
54
3
Left handversion
Right handversion
6
2
1.5mm
PH X1
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS 30 single phase
(03.0) 3-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06291
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
3-1...3-2 (03.0)
Z-3 (02.0) A4 4512 982 0091.Z-4 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0091.
Control desk
Contents
1. Control Desk 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Second handswitch (Option) 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Control desk 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06291
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS 30 single phase Installation
(03.0)3--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06291
1. Control Desk
1.1. Second handswitch (Option)
Remove the eight screws (hexagon sockets) belowthe user interface.
Connect the handswitch to J15 on the ATP--console(J15/1 = Common, J15/2 = Prep., J15/3 = Exp.)and establish the connection to the secondhandswitch.
Adapter (1) is delivered in the accessory kit of thegenerator cabinet.
Close the console.
1.2. Control Desk
Three versions of control desks can be installed.
1 For fixing the stand alone use template Z--3.
2 The table versions can be positioned without anyfixings at the table. Only two fixing bolts at backside must be removed.
3 The desk support plate has to be removed fromthe column of the stand alone version.
Use template Z--4 to mount the correspondingsupport plate to the wall. Snap the control desk onthe support plate.
J
1
5
6
2
3 4
8 7
HOPTIMUS
1J15
AEC -- Console
2 3
ATP -- Console
Secondhandswitch
1
1
2
3 HOPTIMUS
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS 30 single phase
(03.0) 3-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06301
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
3-1...3-4 (03.0)
Z-1.3 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0091.Z-1.4 (02.0) A4 4512 982 0091.Z-2.1 (02.0) A4 4512 982 0091.Z-2.2 (02.0) A4 4512 982 00911
Mechanical Installation
Contents
1. Mechanical Installation 3--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Installing the generator basement 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Installing the wall support for the generator 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3. Installing the generator 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4. Installation of PMA 800 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06301
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS 30 single phase Installation
(03.0)3--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06301
1. Mechanical Installation
1.1. Installing the generator basement
NOTEUsually, the generator cabinet stands free.
In seismic areas or if required otherwise, secure thegenerator with four drillings to the floor, see drawing
Z-2.1.The generator can also be positioned at wall side. To
hang the generator, see drawing Z-2.2.
1.2. Installing the wall support for the generator
This support kit is an option and allows positioning thegenerator wall side.
The support kit code No. 4512 591 03171 isincluded with the standart delivery,see drawing Z--2.2.
1.3. Installing the generator
Remove the two screws which fix the generator oncover bottom.
CAUTIONDo not damage the capacitor!
Lift the generator by two persons off the shippingpallet and place it at its destination in the room.
CAUTIONThe generator has a weight of 66 kg!
∅6.2 mm,M6 x²100 mm
18x
HV--Tank
Area to lift up thegenerator
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS 30 single phase
(03.0) 3-3 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06301
1.4. Installation of PMA 800
Concerning fixing and mechanical dimensions of thewall box refer to drawing Z--1.3.
Connect named cables to PMA 800
Main power-hospital to PMA 800N (L2) X22L1 X23PE X25
Main power PMA 800 to generator cabinetN (L2) X22L1 X23PE X25
The main power line is internally(generator cabinet) connected at factory side.
Power ON (for Bucky TS)gen. -- 7x11:4 to X7 (PMA 800) +24 Vgen. -- 7x11:t to X8 (PMA 800) +GND
Power supply (230 V∼) to bucky TS
Main power hospital to PMA 800 ---- X1 = L1
X2 N (L2)(see drawing Z--1.4)
∅10 mm,M8 60 mm
6x
PMA 800
Mainpowerin
Mainpowergernerator
Signalcables
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS 30 single phase Installation
(03.0)3--4 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06301
NOTEThis main power supply is different to the supply
circuit coming in on X22/X23.The main power supply for bucky TS table must be
fused from hospital side ≤ 16 A.
X11 --
X12 --230 V ∼ if 230 V UI is present
output to the table bucky TS
X13 --
X14 --230 V ∼ in case UI = 120 V / 208 V / 240 V
output to the table bucky TS
Trafo T1 is programmed at factory side to UI = 240 V.
If other voltages are used on field side Re - programm T1.
J
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS 30 single phase Installation
(02.0) 3-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06311
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
3-1...3-5 (02.0)
Cable connections
Contents
1. Cable connections 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Cable routing to generator 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Signal Cables 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.1. Power On 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.2. Room Interface - “X-ray warning light” 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.3. Room Interface - “room in use” 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.4. Tube Thermo Switch 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06311
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS 30 single phase
(02.0)3--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06311
1. Cable connections
1.1. Cable routing to generator
Fix the external system cables securely at thecabinet.
- Internally route each cable along the back sidetowards the cable outlet positions and secure thecables at the cabinet by using cable ties.
- Check all connectors on the PCBs and inside thecabinet.
Check that all electrical connections are firm andsecured and that all cable clamps are in place andthat drag relief is provided.
Check that all the cables are correctly routed.
NOTEBefore mounting the covers of the cabinet, performconfiguration, calibration and acceptance tests.
1.2. Signal Cables
1.2.1. Power On
Connect
- ZX11:4 to X7 on PM 800- ZX11:7 to X8 on PM 800
3F9
3F73F63F23F8
3TS1
X11
X1X3
Screen
GND
+ 24 V UNR17
18relay
3TS1
Power On
4
7
ZX11X7
X8bucky TS
PM 800
115/230 VAC
X13
X14
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS 30 single phase Installation
(02.0) 3-3 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06311
1.2.2. Room Interface - “X-ray warning light”
NOTERoom warning light is released during “prep” and
“exposure”.
Interconnection with external control relay K1.
The relay K1 (radiation warning indicator) must beordered seperately.Code No. 4512 100 45231 (or supply locally).
Respect the polarity for diode (1N4007) in accordanceto 24 V / GND.
Interconnection of generator interface with internalcontrol relay and externally power supply.
Interconnection of generator interface with controlrelay and internally power supply ∼ (60 W = Pmax).
Select the power supply on 3TS1 according to thelamp voltage (230 V-3TS1:26; 115 V-3TS1:27).
Power rating for external warning light = max 70VA.
-- ROOM LIGHT
+ 24 V UNR17
24
1N4007relay
115/230 VAC
3TS1X--Ray Room
roomwarninglight
K1
ROOM LIGHT SW
ROOM LIGHT SUP 47
48
115/230 VAC
3TS1X--Ray Room
roomwarninglight
ROOM LIGHT SW
230 VAC*26
48
3TS1
X-Ray Room47
0VAC*10
ROOM LIGHT SUP
roomwarninglight
add jumper
27
230/115 VAC
115 VAC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS 30 single phase
(02.0)3--4 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06311
1.2.3. Room Interface - “room in use”
NOTERoom warning light is released with “generator
powered ON”. = Room in use.
For K1a = 120 VAC / K1b 240 VAC Relais
X1
PMA800
K1b
K1a120 V
240 V
X2
L1
L2 (N)
K1
T1X13
X14
U = 230 V
Room warning light
F1 6A
NOTEK1 (a/b) must be supplied locally.
For K1 c = + 24 V DC
X7
PMA800
K1c 120 V
240 V
X8
+24 V
GND
K1c
T1X13
X14
U = 230 V
Room warning light
K1 = Code No. 4512 100 45231 or supply locally
X13
(a/b)
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS 30 single phase Installation
(02.0) 3-5 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06311
Interconnection of door switches.
If there are no door switches bridge 8 to 10 at 7X11. Ifthis bridge is missing, the generator shows “no ready”condition.
1.2.4. Tube Thermo Switch
An X-ray tube is provided by the thermostat or pressureswitch signal, cable(s) must be connected to theterminal block 4TS2 in the power cabinet:
THERMOSTATWIRES
TERMINAL 4TS2
THERMOSTAT SIGNAL 1 4TS2--4
THERMOSTATCOMMON (GND)
4TS2--5
If an X-ray tube is not provided by the thermostat signal,bridge both terminals in the terminal block 4TS2.
J
-- DOOR
DOOR RTN
22
23
door switches
3TS1X--Ray Room
8
10
7X11
black
white
1
2
3
4
5
6
4TS2
GND
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS 30 single phase Installation
(02.0) 3-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06321
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
3-1... 3-3 (02.0)
Stator Connection at Generator Side
Contents
1. Stator Connection at Generator Side 3--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Stator Connection at Tube Side 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06321
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS 30 single phase
(02.0)3--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06321
1. Stator Connection at Generator Side
For cable routing see sketch.
DWARNING
Use screened cables.
Connect the screen to earth at both ends.
Do not mix up with the phases; otherwise,
components of the rotor control may be destroyed.
Shorten the stator cable to the reuired length.
Keep enough length to open the module panel.
Connect
-- wire 1 to 4TS2 pin 2
-- wire 2 to 4TS2 pin 3
-- wire 3 to 4TS2 pin 1
-- screen to
3F9
3F73F63F23F8
3TS1
X11
X1X3
Screen
1
2
3
4
4TS2stator cable
3
1
2
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS 30 single phase Installation
(02.0) 3-3 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06321
1.1. Stator Connection at Tube Side
In case the tube is delivered with the system, theconnections are already done at factory.
At the tube end:
Place the jumpers across terminals 100 and 200accordingly.
Connect the stator cable.Use: wire 1 for phase U
wire 2 for phase Vwire 3 for phaseW
Earth the screen of the stator cable at the tubehousing with the metallic clamp.
J
U
V
W
101 202
109 210
RO 1750(PHILIPS)
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS 30 single phase
(03.0) 3-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06331
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
3-1...3-5 (03.0)
Z1-1 (01.0) A3 4512 983 06221Z-7.2 (02.0) A3 4512 982 0014.
H.T.-Unit
Contents
1. H.T.-Unit 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. H.V.-Generator 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. X-Ray Tube 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. Main Connection 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1. Resistance Check 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2. Earthing of PMA 800 - Generator - bucky TS 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3. Main Connection 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4. Installation of Emergency Switch 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. Connection between control desk - generator cabinet side. 3-53.1. Programming 50 / 60 Hz on control desk 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2. VA audible and visible alarm 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3. Connection for AEC J1 / J2 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06331
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS 30 single phase Installation
(03.0)3--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06331
1. H.T.-Unit
CAUTIONThe terminal pins of the high voltage cables are
extremely sensitive to damage. Take particular careof handling them. Ensure that they are straight and
the ends of the pins end up parallel.
1.1. H.V.-Generator
CAUTIONDo not tilt the H.V. generator when transporting it!
In case a tilting angle of 45_ has been exceeded, thesetting-to-work of the generator can be started notbefore a waiting time of about 8 hours has passed.Otherwise the H.V. generator may be destroyed byelectrical spark over!
Unpack generator cabinet.
Unpack the H.V. generator.In case oil is visible on the high tension tank,check oil level in the H.T.-tank,tolerance: 24 mm ± 2 mmOil: Shell Diala G in 2.5 l container4512 148 43172
Make sure that no foreign matter falls into the oil!Otherwise the transformer must be exchanged!
Remove the named “vent.” (ilation) screw.The screw should only be inserted while moving thegenerator.
Check oil level at the anode and cathode cables.
If there is not enough oil at the plug connections openthe oil plug at the HV transformer and remove withinjector some oil from the transformer side.Anode and cathode cables are furnished according tothe room layout (length of the cables).
24 mm at20 - 30 _C
deaerating hole
HV-Tank
Ventilationscrew
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS 30 single phase
(03.0) 3-3 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06331
Put approximately 1 cm (0.5”) of HV-oil in theHV-transformer plug connections.Do not use a silicone washer.Do not grease the plugs with silicone.
Carefully connect the anode and cathode cable ofthe X-ray tube to the respective HV-transformerplug connection. Ensure that all connections aredone correctly, respect polarity.
Tighten the cable nuts securely.
1.2. X-Ray Tube
1 Grease only the top of the H.T. connector withthe delivered silicon grease.
2 Position the silicon washer to the H.T. connector.
Carefully connect the anode and cathode cable tothe respective X-ray tube plug connection. Ensurethat all connections are done correctly.Respect the polarity of the anode and the cathode.
Tighten the cable nuts securely.
2. Main Connection
2.1. Resistance Check
Check the mains resistance measured on PMA 800X22 to X23.
Umains = 208 V-- Umains = ___________V
-- RXG = _____________mΩ (± 64 mΩ)
Umains = 230 V-- Umains = ___________V
-- RXG = _____________mΩ (± 74 mΩ)
Umains = 240 V-- Umains = ___________V
-- RXG = _____________mΩ (± 84 mΩ)
NOTE6 mΩ will be added by 6 cm cable length
from PMA 800
10 mm
Silicon washer
12
fromhospital
PMA 800
Ω
X23X22
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS 30 single phase Installation
(03.0)3--4 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06331
2.2. Earthing of PMA 800 - Generator - bucky TS
See “Earthing Diagram Z-7.2”.
Secure the power supply of the electrical roominstallation is OFF.
2.3. Main Connection
The generator is prepared at factory side with amain connection cable 3 x 35 mm2, 6m long.Connect the main cable wires at the PMA box asdelivered to the generator.
CAUTIONThe generator is factory set to 240 VAC line voltage
for single phase.
CAUTIONF4 is linked at factory.
N is present.In case L2 is present, insert F4.
2.4. Installation of Emergency Switch
If a emergency switch must be required locally use thespace (DIN rail) in the PMA 800.All cable routing and connections have to be done inregulations locally.
Secure the emergency switch has been connectedto the room electrical cabinet so that it cuts thepower to the generator when it is switched OFF.
For technical details refer to Z1-1.
mains fromhospital
PMA 800 3 x 35 mm2 , 6 m long
X22 X23
to generator
X25
MOD--6 (right side)TB
L1
N(L2)F4
F3
Spare for ex.Emergency switch off
DIN--Rail
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS 30 single phase
(03.0) 3-5 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06331
3. Connection between control desk - generator cabinet side
Control desk generator cabinetGND - 8 GND - 12J1 6J2J2 3TS1 / 4TS2 connected at factory sideJ3 6J3A / 6J3BJ5 7A1 : J4
3.1. Programming 50 / 60 Hz on control desk
3.2. VA audible and visible alarm
When 80% tube load is reached. The system is indicating this limit with an audible and visible signal. Programmingfor this function via dip switch 3024 SW2-2 control desk to ON (closed) position.
3.3. Connection for AEC J1 / J2
Connect the J1 - Amplimat table andJ2 - Amplimat BWS to
AEC adaptation board 7A1 on generator cabinet side.J4 - Supply from control deskJ3/J5 - Not used
J
3024SW1
CONTROL CONSOLE
1
50 Hz60 Hz
3024SW21 VA - 80 % audible /
visible alarm4
ON
J5
J1 J2 J3 J4
7A1
AEC Adaptation
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
(1~208/230/240V)and bucky DIAGNOST
Mains circuitOPTIMUS 30 Single phaseA3
01-
04-1
0 Sc
hr.
4512 983 06221 C Philips Medical Systems
(01.0) Z1-1
BR4+-
F6
F7
F2T 1.5A
F8
BR2+-
+5V+12V
-12V
+24V-PSU
L1 T1
GND
+5V
+12V
-12V
C72,4 MF
K3
13
14
10 6
11 7
115 VAC SW
9 5
115 VAC
0 VAC
C62,4 MF
-PWR ON
+12V
-12V
+12V UNR
+12V UNR
GND
5
6P2
3
9
2
8
6
7GND
1
-PWR OFF4
-PWR ON
-PWR OFF
GND
T 3A
T 3A
T 3A
*
F9T 0.4A
LF3
1
2
3
4
BR1+-
220 VAC SW
+SUPPLY
-SUPPLY
TS1
17
220 VAC SW
115 VAC SW27
220 VAC SW
115 VAC SW
60 VAC RTR220 VAC RTR
12 8
1
4
2
3
7
10
8
9
6
jumper
jumper
+24VK3
( S3-E1 )
( S5-F4 )
POWER
0 VAC RTR ( S5-F3 )
( S3-C4 )
+24V
F4
F3
+24V
L1 T1
L2 T2L2 T2
R120 ohm, 100w
K6
A
B
-CHRG DR
L1
N
F13
10
J3
-LINE CONT-LINE CONT
T 10A
T 10A
T 50A
T 50A
DELAYED
LF1
+24V-PSU
K5
A
B
BUS +
BUS -
LAMP
26
15-12 V
16
+12 V
( S3-B4 )
( S3-D4 )
( S4-F2 )
( S4-F2 )
MA
INS
LO
AD
R333 ohm
C5470 nF
CR2
R433 ohm
C6470 nF
R533 ohm
C9470 nF
CR3
R633 ohm
C10470 nF
C71 nF
C111 nF
C8470 nF
AC3
+
-
AC2
24 VAC TR
0 VAC TR( S4-D1 )
115 VAC
21
9
7
8
6
5
4
1
20
18
15
12
11
208 VAC
240 VAC
230 VAC
0 VAC
220 VAC
19 VAC
10.4 VAC
0 VAC
140 VAC
0 VAC 17
2
35
13
28 VAC
0 VAC
Shield Stud
3
60 VAC
3012 VAC
20 VAC
24 VAC
T2POWER INPUT TRANSFORMER
PS1LVDC POWER SUPPLY
6NL1
INPUT RECTIFIER BOARD
16 VAC14 VAC
22 VAC
26 VAC
19
3132331634
Module 3
Module 2
F12
Module 5A5
F2
3.2A slowX16
X15
X12
X11
X6
X5 T1B0004145
240V
208V
120V
3TS1:18
3TS1:17X10X9
0.63A slow
F3 D1
D2K1
X7 =24V
X8 -GND
24VDC
+
-
X13
X14
output230V
L (230)
N (230)
Bucky TS
N
L
emergency offswitch
PE
L1
N (L2)
3 x 4mm -6m2
X32PE
X21
X22
X23X24
X25X26X27
X28X29X30X31
X17X18X19X20
N (L2)
L1
spare
PEL1
N(L2)
PEPE
U= 120V...240V
4...10Input
with ESU toOPTIMUS 30generator
Spare for X-ray roomlight andemergency off
PMA 800
X11/12 if 230V main is presentconnect direct without Trafo T1
Module 6
X4
X3
MainX2
X1
N (L2)
L1
6A
Motor protection switch
F1
7X11:4
7X11:7
X20
(supply it locally)
350V (
+
+-10%)DC
110 VAC
* Connected to: - 110V AC for stand alone option- according to mains without stand alon
220V/115Vexternalsupply forRoom RADindication
GND -12*
* In Case N is presentFuse F4 is linked.
F= 16A
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS Installation
4512--983--05971 (02.0) 3--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
3-1 (02.0)
Z--6.1 (01.0) A4 4512 982 0099.Z--6.2 (01.0) A4 4512 982 0099.
Installation wall junction box
1. Installing the wall junction boxMount the wall junction box at the place where the generator is intended to be installed.(See drawing “Connection of generator” and manual UNIT 4512 103 75380 for wall junction boxes).
If necessary, install the optional surge arrester WN inside the wall junction box.(See surge arrester documentation.)
If applicable, mount the filler panels of the generator to the wall junction box.
Have the mains cable present at the clinic connected to mains terminal MEX by a person who is authorized forthis job.
Check the phase sequence of L1, L2 and L3.
DWARNING
Switch OFF the mains supply present at the clinic and make sure that it cannot be switched ON again
accidentally.
J
4512--983--05971
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS Installation
(03.0) 3--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--05991
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
3-1...3-7 (03.0)
Z--1.3 (01.0) A4 4512 982 0099.Z1--11.1 (02.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05521Z2--5.2 (b/02.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05511
Installation control desk
Contents
1. Installing the operating panel 3--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Desk version 3--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Stand version 3--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3. Wall mounted version 3--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4. Supporting angle version 3--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5. Additional release switch 3--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--05991
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Instalation OPTIMUS
(03.0)3--2 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--05991
1. Installing the operating panel
1.1. Desk version
See ”Operating panel” Z--1.3.
Accessories:
-- 2 feet for the unit
-- 2 elastic buffers, black
-- 5 insert strips for the RGDV buttons
-- sheet with RGDV symbols
-- release switch
Unpack the desk carefully.
Mount the release switch on the left-hand orright-hand side of the desk:
Mount the holding bracket to the edge of thedesk (1) with the twoM4x10 countersunk screws.
For visual reasons the release button should be inline with the +/-- buttons on the control desk. Usethe appropriate holes in the bracket.
Slide the release switch onto the bracket.Fasten it parallel to the desk edge with the twoM4x10 cheese-head screws, securing rings andwashers (2).
Screw in the 2 feet for the unit at the bottom of thedesk.
Glue the 2 black elastic buffers to the front edgesof the bottom of the desk such that they are actingas the front feet.
184H95
C300 X3
1 2
3
150H94
2x
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS Installation
(03.0) 3--3 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--05991
Define the assignment of the RGDV buttons 1 ...8. Glue the respective symbols to the insert stripswhich are provided with subsidiary lines (1).
Raise the keyboard about 3mm above the desk.Use an allen key (2).
Push the insert strips under the keyboard foil.Press the angulated, protruding end of each insertstrip into the housing of the desk (3).
Lower the keyboard to its initial position (4).
Remove the cable cover at the rear side of thedesk.
Connect the cables:
Supply cable EZX20 <------> C200X1EZX6 <------> earth
Data cable EZX46 <------> C300X1
Release switch <------> C300X3
Patient Data Organizer <------> C300X2 (option)
Check the function programming plug for X44 as shown in Z2--5.2 and put it into socket EZX44.
Provide drag relief for the supply and data cables with the clamp present on the desk.
Screw on the cable cover.Make sure that the cable drag relief device of the release switch (1 cable tie) remains under the cover.
151H96
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
3mm
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Instalation OPTIMUS
(03.0)3--4 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--05991
1.2. Stand version
See ”Operating panel” Z--1.3.
Additional accessories:
-- 4 dowels S10
-- 4 hexagon cap screws 8 x 60mm
-- 4 washers
S Position the desk stand according to the respective room layout.
S Mark the fixing holes on the floor.
S Set the 4 dowels supplied into the floor (drill bit: 10mm).
S Screw on the desk stand with 4 screws and washers.
S Route the supply and data cables from the bottom to the top within the desk stand.Provide the cables with drag relief.Cable ends including plugs should protrude beyond the edge of the desk by about 500mm.
S Mount the release switch as described in chapter 1.1.
S Assign the RGDV buttons 1 ... 8 to the desired symbols as described in chapter 1.1.
S Connect the cables to the desk as described in previous chapter 1.1.
S Screw on the cable cover.Ensure the cable drag relief device of the release switch (1 cable tie) remains under the cover.
S Mount the operating panel on the stand.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS Installation
(03.0) 3--5 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--05991
1.3. Wall mounted version
See ”Operating panel” Z--1.3.
Additional accessories:
-- 4 ball-head bolts
-- 4 dowels S8
-- 4 hexagon cap screws 5 x 30mm
-- 4 washers
-- 2 screws 4 x 10mm
-- 2 angle plates
-- 4 nuts
Screw on the angle plates into the wall frame.The short ends of the angles must be pointingupwards.
Screw the 4 ball-head bolts into the wall support.
Mark the 4 fixing holes of the wall frame at therespective place on the wall.
Set the dowels supplied into the wall(drill bit: 8mm).
Screw on the wall frame with the 4 hexagon capscrews and washers.
Provide drag relief for the supply and data cablesin the wall frame.Cable ends including plugs should protrudebeyond the edge of the desk by about 500mm.
Mount the release switch as described in chapter1.1.
Assign the symbols to the desired RGDVbuttons 1 ... 8 as described in chapter 1.1.
Connect the cables to the desk as described inprevious chapter 1.1.
Mount the operating panel on the wall frame andfix it with the left two screws.
Screw on the cable cover.Ensure the cable drag relief device of the releaseswitch (1 cable tie) remains under the cover.
The wall frame is designed symmetrically.In case connection cables come from above theframe can be mounted upside down.Only the ball-head bolts and the angle plates stillkeep their position.
189H96
Wall fastening (4x) Ball--head bolt (4x)
Desk fastening (2x)
Cable passage
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Instalation OPTIMUS
(03.0)3--6 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--05991
1.4. Supporting angle version
Screw the ball-head bolts (2) into thesupporting angles (1):
Left angle ------> on the left at the bottom
Right angle ------> on the right at the bottom
Press the ball-head bolts (2) into the respectivesnap bushing of the desk (4).
Fix the supporting angles (2) to the desk (4) withthe 2 screws M4 (3).
4
3
2
1
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
096L99
32-- /HSPRRQ
31-- /HSEXRQ
30-- / UI-- / --24V HS
8 9
1 5
S1
S211 12
3 6
bl
blk
br1
2
3
1
2
3
bl
blk
br1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 EXP PREP
Hand switch 4512 103 7200x(9803 700 3000x)
Hand switch with adapter (9890 000 0249x)
Cable adapter4512 104 3823x
Operating panel CC300 X3
67
9
OPTIMUS Installation
(03.0) 3--7 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--05991
1.5. Additional release switch
An optional second release switch is supplied with alonger spiral cable: 9890 000 0249x
The scope of delivery includes various wall hooksand an adapter cable. Electrical connection is madein parallel with the existing release switch which ismounted on the desk itself.
To do this, plug the pins of the adapter cable intothe D-Sub connector of the existing releaseswitch.
Sequence:
Adapter:connector pin <------> D-Sub:
connector pin
1 <------> 6
2 <------> 9
3 <------> 7
Reference: Figure below and drawing Z1-11.1 “Operating panel C”.
J
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
+40 ... +44V
eff2 x 2V
X2:15
X2:14
X2:13
X2:12
X2:11
NR PR X/
EZX46XRG bus
GND GEN
Operating panel C
c Philips Medical Systems
(02.0)
Power supplyC200A1
/A3
02-0
8-08
EZX6
16 bit
trapezoidal~ 10% / 20kHz ~20%
+4.95 ... +5.25V
Output specification
+14.25 ... +15.75V
CAN bus
blk
bl
GND 15V
1+15V
rd
4512 104 38231
9890 000 02491
Cable adapter
Hand switch with adapter
H40
H42
H1
H9
H33
H41 H45
NR PR X/
4
59
1)
20*H17
C100
X2:2X2:1
+5V
CPU
alphanumeric display
S39
D5
PO 15V
1)
B1
V20
H29 16*H30 16*
16*H3216* 16*
H25
Z1-11.1
EZX46XRG bus
RD MN ON/
as Patient Data Organizer
Schr
.
RD PR X
GND 15V
PO 15V
PO 5V
Release switchEXP
D5
X1:12
D1RS 232driver
RQ SN X/
H2
X1:06
X2:23
driver
X2:22
X2:21
X2:20
X2:19
driver
X3
3
LED matrix
PO 15V
8
72
6
+
+5V
K1
GND 12V
MN ON/
+5V
C300
X2:26
X2:49
X2:1X2:2X2:3X2:4
X2:5
X2:6X2:7X2:8X2:9
X2:10
Desk panel
X4:1
X2:50
X1:15
X1:7
X4:49
X1:14
X2:47
X4:50K1
EN X/
PO 12V
X1:11
D7/D8
CAN H
X1:2CAN L
X2:16
X1:13
X2:17
MAP decoder
X1:10
S30 S31
S15S12
S24
S3
S22 S23
S2
S19
S37
S32
S21
S13S11
S4
S20
S35 S36
S10 S14
S29S28S27S26S25
S18
S34
S17
S33
S7S5 S8
S16S9
S6S1
X2:18
D3
X4:23
X4:22
EPROMD2
X4:21
X4:20
X4:19
PREP
Hand switch
H7H6
1
H5
H16
H4
2
H3
H15
H2
H14
S24
H13H12H11H10
H37H36H35H34
H44H43
+20 ... +30V
D516bitmicro
controller
X2:47
X2:48
S38OFF
X2:22
X4:46trapezoidal~ 10% / 20kHz ~20%
X2:46+15V
X4:48
X4:11
X4:12
X4:13
X4:14
X4:15
X4:16
X4:17
X4:18
micro controller
Input specification
RESET/
GND 15V
X1:8
RD PR X
X1:1
2 x 4V
X1:2
eff
PO 26V
EZX20
X1:1 B2
X1:3
+
X2:25.
X4:25.
..
..X2:39X4:39
SENSE
X1:4X1:5
X14X2:4
X1:6
X2:5
X1:7
X15X2:6
X16X1:8
X2:7
X2:8
X2:10
X2:11X2:12
...X2:23
V21
V3
Ready
Start
X2
61
8
2
3
V21
7
PO 15V
rdH1
PO 15V
RTS
CTS
Error
TXD
RXD
V3
RD PR X
+15V
+42V
2V, 20kHz
X10X1:21
...
X11
X12
X1:17
...
X13
X2:17
X1:14
X1:22
X1:13
...
X2:21
X1:23
X1:12
X2:14
X1:26
X1:11
X2:13
X1:9X1:10X2:9
P0 15V
H3116*
16*H27
H2616*
H28
5
4
PC
X4:2X4:3X4:4
X4:5
CAN - announcment
Selftest
1)
X4:6
Remarks:
X4:7X4:8X4:9X4:10
Pull-up resistor andlinks C300X3:1 - 6 / 3 -7 / 5 - 9from CPU 4512 108 08244 onwards.
C300CPU
ON4V, 20kHz
4V, 20kHz
2V, 20kHz
X1:2
X18
X1:1X17
X1:3
X19X2:3
Power supplyforalphanumeric display
controller
16 bit
NR PR X/
micro controller
X1:5
X1:4
PO 15V
D4
RAM4512 103 72001
+5V
push button matrix
S1
br 1
S2
HSPRRQ blH39
HSEXRQ blk
H8
3
2
4512 983 05521
X1
X17X18X19
X14X15X16
X13 X10
X11
X12
soldering side
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
02-0
3-19
Basis rack-2 Z4512 108 0936.
Schr
./Kö
A1/A
3 Backpanel EZ
Philips Medical Systemsc
Z2-5.2(b/02.0)
V53
MN OFPO 0VV45 V46
PO 12V
RESET C/3
4
5
V47V49
3
412
513
614
715
8
Tube extension
5
6
2
41
3
24V74 V70 V71 V72 V73 V77
2
3
5
6
1 2
X3
PO 26V
X18
2
X1711
1
5
PO 26V 1
4
3
V5V4
PO 26V
V3
Operating panel
kV power unit EQ/E2Q
Tube supervision
2
1 4
1
2
X201
2
2
10
X191
9
V7
8
7
6
V6
X12H.V. generator
2513
V86 12
11
820
719
6
5
4
3
18
17
16
15
10
H.V. generator
X11
9
V19
10
V14
X ACT S/
CAN L
CAN H
X71CAN H
STOP X C/
RESET C/X73CTRL X C/X74
15
5
7
13
19 9
14
2
4
6
12 59
V32
I2 2
I2 3
I2 4
E PO CV2
CV2 GND
CV2 GND OLCV2 ID/
TP HT SG
TB CU FR PO
2
V36 V39
HT AN
12
13
14
3
15
4
5
X46
8
7
6
1
2
X14
3
135
124
3
AC 230V L2
1
AC 0V XG
AC 230V L12
X15
V65
14
12
V66
412
5
614
715
NG 15VPO 15V
MN ON
PO 5VCAN H PO 12V
7MN EM OF
8RD MN 0N MN EM OF
R32
switch on circuitEmergency OFF
815
714
6
1)15
14
13
12
8
7
6
11
5
4
103
91
V31 V33
CAN LCAN H
V40
Decade adapter WA/WB
V27 V23
Operating panel
EN X/
RQ SN X/NR PR X/
PO 15V
MN ON
AC 0V XG2
1X13
AC 0V XG
3
4
Operating panel,
X4X47
CAN PO 5V
Power supply
HT CA GNDHT AN GND
TP HT GND
TB CU FR NG
9
10
NG 15V
11
V24V34V28
PO 26V
16
2
AC 230V L1 AC 230V L1
11
210
19
CV2 65 ID/
X45
V35
CTRL X C/
V13 V15
X72
V17
EN X C/
X76
15
13
X52
CAN L
1
X ACT S/
62
RESET C/7
3
STOP X C/8
4
R2
CV2 EN/
V87
RX CAN 2
CAN HCAN L
V89 V91 V92 V93 V94
PO 15VPO 15V
RM DR CT
R1
PO V
V60 V57
X ACT/
CTRL X/
NR PR X/
V59
V55
RESET C/
V58
CAN L
4512 104 910224512 130 5444.
PO 5VCAN H
CAN L
RC ON/
8
7
6
5
2
1
13
2)
I1 4/
E NG CV1
CV1 TMCV1 OL
I2 1/
I2 2/
I2 3/
I2 4/E NG CV2
CV2 TM
CV2 SH
S CAN GND
I1 3/
I1 2/I1 1/
EN X/
PO 0V
RQ SN X/PW ON PO
SI PH/
PO 26V 1 PO 26V 1
kV power unit EQ
PO 26V
TB 2/
TB 2 RT/
TB 3/
TB 3 RT/
V21
21
22
HT CA
23
X351
PO 15V
I1 4
E PO CV1
CV1 ID/
CV1 GND OL
CV1 GNDCV1 EN/
CV1 65 ID/
V78
I2 1
kV power unit E2Q
V76 V75
I1 3
I1 2
I1 1
13
X34
12
14
11
18
17
14
16
15
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
1
2
2310
19
20
229
21V18 V22 V20
3
2
X81
11
10RESET C/
9RC RD/
1nF
130R
Termination resistor for X45
V11
V16
X77EN X C/
X75
for OPTIMUS C
To System CAN X432)
To Signal Bus X231)
1)
1)
2)
operating panel CwithFunction programming plug for X44
operating panel C
R/F
RX CAN 1
V62V67 V64
Rotor control 2
V63V61
RD MN ON
TH OL
CM TH
4512 104 9004.
X151
9 PW ON NG/
without
V48
RAD+CD
TH OL SW/
CM TH SW
X44
1
FI TF2 2FI TF1 2
FI TF2 1FI TF1 1
X6X51
2 2
X24
V88V90
MN ON
19
V69
2
11
10
24
S CAN PO
PO V
RESET SW/
4512 983 05511
34
125
136
147
158
11
210
19
Generator CAN termination plug
V12
V56
V54
R4
L2 L3
V10
V50 V51
For survey of the components see Z2-5.4
CAN move to WAX52 / WBX52
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS Installation
(02.0) 3--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--05981
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
3-1 ... 3-3 (02.0)
Preparatory work
1. Preparatory work
1.1. Mounting of the H.V. generator in the cabinet
CAUTIONDo not tilt the H.V. generator while transporting it.
In case of a tilting angle larger than 45_, the setting-to-work of the generator can be started not before a
waiting time of about 8 hours has passed. Otherwise the H.V. generator may be destroyed by electrical
sparkover.
Unpack generator cabinet E.
In case the packingmaterial is strongly soiledwithoil check the oil level. Repair it if necessary.
Tolerance: 2mmOil: Shell Diala G in 2.5l container
4512 148 43172
Remove the deaerating screw completely from the cover of the H.V. generator. Only this way the precision ofthe high voltage measuring divider corresponds to the specification.In case of return shipment of theH.V. generator this screwmust be fixed again. Therefore, keep the screw layingon top of the cover.
CAUTIONMake sure that no foreign matter falls into the oil. Otherwise the transformer must be exchanged.
Take the two transport bars from the rear side of the cabinet.
Lift the H.V. generator into the generator cabinet with the transport bars.The 4 connecting bolts GX1001 to 1004 must point at the front of the generator cabinet.
4512--983--05981
142H94
24mm at 20 - 30_C
deaerating hole
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS
(02.0)3--2 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--05981
1.2. Electrical connection of the H.V. generator
Connect the H.V. generator electrically:
Generator ConnectionRemarkGenerator
version from <------> toRemark
E1 (GND) <------> GX1100 (GND) Ground
50/65/80kW ZX12 <------> G100X15 Route the cables along the front and left--ZX35 <------> G100X14
Route the cables along the front and lefthand edge of the H.V. generator. Fix them.
QC13:1 <------> GX1003
Twist the cables!
NoteThe sequence of the connecting bolts is notin numerical order.See drawing page 1--3
50kWQC03:1 <------> GX1002
See drawing page 1--3.
Push the screening cap forward over theconnecting bolts and tighten it. Attach theconverter cables including the screening tothe screening cap with cable ties.
GX1001 <------> GX1003The 50kW version might have direct linkson each side or a link on one side and achoke of 1 ... 6 loops on the other side forthe reason of kV symmetry
GX1004 <------> GX1002
the reason of kV symmetry.
NoteDo not change these links or chokes.
QC13:1 <------> GX1001Twist the cables!
Note
65/80kW
QC03:1 <------> GX1002
NoteThe sequence of the connecting bolts is notin numerical order.See drawing page 1--365/80kW
2QC13:1 <------> GX1003
See drawing page 1--3.
Push the screening cap forward over theconnecting bolts and tighten it Attach the
2QC03:1 <------> GX1004
connecting bolts and tighten it. Attach theconverter cables including the screening tothe screening cap with cable ties.
WGX61 <------> GK1:1
50/65/80kW WGX67 <------> GK1:2
2nd tube WGX62 <------> GK2:1
WGX68 <------> GK2:2
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS Installation
(02.0) 3--3 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--05981
Turn the two earthing angles of the H.V. generator outward and screw them on to the members of the cabinet.
J
199H96
converter cables (twisted)
terminal for the screenof the filament cable
screening capearthing angles
fixing signal cable
fixed at the screening cap
Connection of50kW version
X1001
QC13:1
QC 03:1
X1002
Connection of65/80kW version
X1001 X1003
QC03:1
QC13:1
X1004
2QC13:1
2QC03:1Twist the cable Twist the cables
Link or choke Link or choke
X1002X1003 X1004
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Installation
(02.1) 4--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06081
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
3-1...3-12 (02.1)
Z1--1.2 (97.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05751Z1--2.1 (97.0) A2/A3 4512 983 05761Z1--2.1.1 (02.0) A2/A3 4512 983 05951Z1--2.2 (97.1) A2/A3 4512 983 05941Z1--2.2.1 (02.0) A2/A3 4512 983 05961Z1--6 (02.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05531Z1--14.1 (b/98.0) A2/A3 4512 983 05541Z1--14.2 (c/97.1) A1/A3 4512 983 05551Z1--15.1 (97.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05571Z2--5.2 (b/02.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05511
Electrical connection
Contents
1. Electrical connection 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Earthing 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Mains connection 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.1. Mains connection of the generator 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3. Stator connection 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.1. Shielding 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.2. Connection 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4. Signal cables 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.1. Room decade cable 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2. Tube supervision 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.3. CAN interface 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.4. Adapter for 4 auxiliary units 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.5. Dose inputs 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.6. Patient Data Organizer PDO (option) 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5. H.V. cables generator side 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6. Emergency-OFF circuit 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06081
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS RAD
(02.1)4--2 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06081
1. Electrical connection
1.1. Earthing
See ”Earthing diagram” in section 4.
1.2. Mains connection
1.2.1. Mains connection of the generator
DWARNING
Switch OFF the mains supply present at the clinic and make sure that it cannot be switched ON again
accidentally.
See ”Connection diagram” in section 4.
Measure the internal mains resistance at the terminal MEX with a suitable measuring instrument.
L1 - L2: Ri = ............... mΩ
L1 - L3: Ri = ............... mΩ
L2 - L3: Ri = ............... mΩ
Required max. mains resistance at generator input:
Mains voltageMains resistance
Mains voltage30kW 50kW 65/80kW
190V * -- 40mΩ --
220V * 130mΩ 60mΩ --
240V * 160mΩ 80mΩ --
380V 500mΩ 300mΩ 200mΩ
400V 500mΩ 300mΩ 200mΩ
440V 500mΩ 350mΩ 240mΩ
460V 500mΩ 350mΩ 240mΩ
480V 500mΩ 400mΩ 300mΩ
* with external mains transformer (max 50kW)
Maximum permissible internal mains resistance: 500mΩ
CAUTIONConnect phase wires in correct phase sequence.
Connect the mains cable of the generator to terminal MEX: L1 / L2 / L3 within the wall connection box.If the optional surge arrester WN is fitted, connect the cables at that point to terminal WNX1100.
Connect the examination unit supply (max. 5A) to terminal MEX: T1 / T2 / T3.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Installation
(02.1) 4--3 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06081
1.3. Stator connection
1.3.1. Shielding
CAUTIONTo suppress interferences of the high-speed rotor control, the stator connections must be provided with a 360_
screen at the tube and generator end.
General remarks:
Always use screened cables: 0722 215 02054.
Shorten the stator cable to the required length.Do not accommodate excess lengths at thegenerator.
Keep stator cable separate from all the othersignal cables to avoid interference.
Earth the screen at both cable ends.
Screening procedure:
Remove any enamel or dirt from the clampproviding drag relief in the tube housing to makesure the clamp is conductive.
Remove the plastic covering around the clamp,about 1cm (0.5”).
Wrap copper foil around the visible screen of thecable until the original diameter of the cable isobtained.
Remove the present red wire going from thescreen end to the earthing point of the tubehousing.
Fix the screen of the stator cable with the clamp.Ensure that the clamp is secured and the groundcontact works!
327H97Screening of the stator cable.
Copper foil layers up tothe insulation diameter
Wire must be discarded
ROT 350 fixing clamp
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS RAD
(02.1)4--4 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06081
1.3.2. Connection
CAUTIONDo not mix up the phases, otherwise components of the rotor control may be destroyed.
At the tube end
Place the jumpers across terminals 100 and 200according to the figure.
Connect the stator cable:
wire 1 ------> phase Uwire 2 ------> phase Vwire 3 ------> phase W
Earth the screening of the stator cable at the tubehousing with the metallic clamp.
148H94
SRO/RO
101 202
109 210
U
VW
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Installation
(02.1) 4--5 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06081
At the generator end: One-tube version
See ”Connection diagram” in section 4.
Connect the stator cable to the terminal EX1100(U-V-W).
Check the stator connection by measuring theresistances:
U -- V = wire 1 -- 2 ≈ 11ΩU -- W = wire 1 -- 3 ≈ 20ΩV -- W = wire 2 -- 3 ≈ 9Ω
If an inductance meter is available, measure thefollowing inductance values:
U -- V = wire 1 -- 2 = 57mH ±10%V -- W = wire 2 -- 3 = 34mH ±10%
Fix the screen below the screening clamp.
Relieve the tension of the stator cable by a cabletie.
At the generator end: Two-tube version
See ”Connection diagram” in section 4.
Connect the stator cables to the terminalsEWG:K11/K12.
Check the stator connections of both tubes bymeasuring the resistances:
U -- V = wire 1 -- 2 ≈ 11ΩU -- W = wire 1 -- 3 ≈ 20ΩV -- W = wire 2 -- 3 ≈ 9Ω
If an inductance meter is available, measure thefollowing inductance values:
U -- V = wire 1 -- 2 = 57mH ±10%V -- W = wire 2 -- 3 = 34mH ±10%
Fix the screen below the screening clamp.
Relieve the tension of the stator cables by cableties.
191H96
rotor control
tube
X1100
screeningclamp
cable tie
U V W
1 2 3
E
198H98
cable ties
tube 1 tube 2
screening clamps
WGE2 64 2 64
1 32
1 32
K11 K12
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS RAD
(02.1)4--6 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06081
At the generator end: Three-tube version
See ”Connection diagram” in section 4.
Connect the stator cables to the terminalsE1WG:K12 and E2WG:K11/K12.
Check the stator connections of all 3 tubes bymeasuring the resistances:
U -- V = wire 1 -- 2 ≈ 11ΩU -- W = wire 1 -- 3 ≈ 20ΩV -- W = wire 2 -- 3 ≈ 9Ω
If an inductance meter is available, measure thefollowing inductance values:
U -- V = wire 1 -- 2 = 57mH ±10%V -- W = wire 2 -- 3 = 34mH ±10%
Fix the screens below the screening clamps.
Relieve the tension of the stator cables by cableties. 348H98
tube 2
K12
1WG
screening clamps
tube 1 tube 3
K11 K12
2WGE
cable ties
2 64
1 32
2 64
13
2 132
2 64K11
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Installation
(02.1) 4--7 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06081
1.4. Signal cables
See: -- ”Connection diagram” in section 4.-- Z1--6 ”Basic interface”.
1.4.1. Room decade cable
Connect the door switches at the generator:
EZX1: 8 <------> switch <------> 10
In case no switch is presentlink: pin 8 <------> pin 10
EZ150 K1:
max. switching and loading current = 1A
max. Load = 60VA AC= 30W DC
CAUTIONMake sure the polarity of the relay is correct.
RM DR 0V
RM DR CT
10
6CMSW
PO26V5
4
143H94
8
9
Wall junction boxUmax.=230VImax.=1A
radiationindication
door switches
EWGX3
ME
EWGX2EZX1 orroom 1room 2
SW UN EX --
+
screen
1 WG X3 room 2
2 WG X2 room 1
2 WG X3 room 3
or
Door switch connection.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS RAD
(02.1)4--8 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06081
In case of tube 2 or 3 is located in room 2 or 3 orwhile room decades
-- WG X3 or-- 1WG X3 or-- 2WG X3
are intended to be used for room supervision thesoldering link WG W1 must be placed.Only when this link is placed it is guaranteed thatrelay WG K3 pulls up and room decade WG X3 isactivated when switch-over of the tube takesplace.
See Z1--14.xx ”Tube extension”.
If needed connect an external relay for eachexamination room to control external radiationwarning devices.
One relay inclusive cable is part of delivery,Additional ones can be ordered: 4512 100 4523.
A mounting place is reserved on the mainsconnection terminal MEX of the wall junction box.
CAUTIONMake sure the polarity of the relay is correct.
door switchesroom 2
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
soldering link
EWG
1
2
X13
W1
1
3
4
25
6
X11
door switchesroom 1
X1 X2 X3
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Installation
(02.1) 4--9 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06081
1.4.2. Tube supervision
Connect the thermal switch or the thermal sensorof the tube housing assembly.
For U.S.A. and U.K. only:
Connect the HHS-lamp to indicate the selectedtube housing assembly.
1.4.3. CAN interface
Only for examination units which are provided with a CAN system interface.
Connect the following plugs:
System Connector
EZX23
signal bus
EZX42 orEZX42--1system CAN
EZX43 orEZX43--1system CAN
BukyDiagnost TH / TH2 X X
DigitalDiagnost X X X
Thoravision X X X
PO 26V
10
6
7
4
190H96
9
HHS lamp24V/ max. 5W
EWGX9
3
EWGX8EZX3 or tube 2tube 1
TH OL
CM TH
TH OL SW
CM TH SW
screen
E1 WG X9 tube 2
E2 WG X8 tube 1
E2 WG X9 tube 3
or
Tube supervision connection.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS RAD
(02.1)4--10 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06081
1.4.4. Adapter for 4 auxiliary units
Adapter for 4 auxiliary units RAD (Bucky, Tomo) WA / 1WA / 2WA used for examination units which provide theircontrol signals individually via decade cables.
Each of the release circuits and the Bucky decades can be assigned to one or several of the RGDV buttons 1...8via software programming.
Survey: ”Connection diagram” in section 4.
Z1--1.2 ”Block diagram Expansions”.
Detail: Z1--15.1 ”Adapter 4 aux. units WA / 1WA / 2WA”.
It provides:
1. 4 release decades to be used for
-- grid / syncmaster auxiliaries
-- HHS cassette present interlock
2. 2 Bucky decades to be used for
-- format size contacts (collimator, side fields ON/OFF)
-- Bucky--tomo remote switch-over
-- tomo ready condition
-- Bucky ready condition
-- HHS cassette present interlockto be activated by SW programming (see modul Configuration part 1 chapter 1.2).
After activation via SW: Signals not provided by the system must be simulated by jumpers.
3. 1 decade EXON signal for the system via opto coupler
4. 1 decade (output) for 8 tomo trajectories
5. 1 decade for 8 tomo time inputs
6. 1 decade for 8 external APRT
-- WA backpanel programmed as 1WA = 2 AUX + 6 APRT
-- WA backpanel programmed as 2WA = 8 APRT
7. 1 decade for PSC (Patient Size Correction)
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Installation
(02.1) 4--11 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06081
1.4.5. Dose inputs
Connect the measuring chambers to the D-Sub connectors EZX21 / 22 / 31 / 32 / 41.
There are no assignement restrictions because the measuring chambers are allocated to the auxiliaries in SWprogramming.
Withdrawpins 101--102--103or A--D--H formeasuring field selection at the junior / extremity measuring chamber.
These measuring chambers have only one measuring field. The terminal for the left-hand field is used in otherconfigurations for switching over intensification and must not be connected here.
NOTEAMPLIMAT cables 9803 507 0xx02 (for hybrid measuring chambers 9803 509 xxxxx) with 3-Plus plugs at both
ends must be connected in the generator by the following adapter for each cable:
Adapter for AMPLIMAT cable: 4512 108 09042. The generator includes 1 adapter.
The hybrid measuring chambers 9803 509 xxxxx require connection (chassis) between contacts
D-Sub end GND (13) <------> RF 0V (8) (generator input)
or
3-Plus end GND (N) <------> RF 0V (J) (generator input)
This connection is established by the adapter for the AMPLIMAT cable.See Z1.6 ”Basic interface” of the generator manual.
In case of a hybrid measuring chamber 9803 509 xxxxx is not operated with the required
AMPLIMAT cables 3-Plus / 3-Plus 9803 507 0xx02. . . . . . . . . .
but with
AMPLIMAT cables D-Sub / 3-Plus 9890 000 017xx. . . . . . . . . .
make sure to establish this connection (13 <------> 8) in the D-Sub connector!
For ALC measuring chambers 9890 000 016xx connection GND <------> RF 0V is not permitted.Therefore, ALC measuring chambers AMPLIMAT cables 9890 000 017xx should always be used.
1.4.6. Patient Data Organizer PDO (option)
See operator’s manual Patient Data Organizer.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS RAD
(02.1)4--12 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06081
1.5. H.V. cables generator side
See ”Connection diagram” in section 4.
Mark the H.V. cables at the generator and the tube end with the correct polarity.
Fix the H.V. cables on the left-hand side of the wall junction box on the middle rail to provide drag relief for thecables. The short ends of the H.V. cables which are going to the H.V. generator must be routed in downwarddirection in this area.The free cable lengths including plugs should be about 1.5m.
Twist the H.V. cables counter-clockwise by one turn and connect them to the H.V. generator.The twisting of the cables allows that the H.V. cables can be put into a loop when the cabinet is placed againstthe wall.
The H.V. sockets should always be filled with some oil. At least the lower half of the plugs must be wet with oil.
CAUTIONDo not use a silicone washer.
Do not grease the plugs with silicone.
The union nuts of the high-voltage connectors must be tightened up to ensure good electrical contact for
screening.
Only high-voltage connectors which have threaded flange halves may be used.
Older high-voltage cables still have connectors where the flange halves are kept together with a spring washer.
In such cases the modification kit 4512 103 80852 is required.
1.6. Emergency-OFF circuit
Connect the emergency-OFF buttons to EZX4:1/2.If not necessary, link pins 1 - 2.
See Z1--2.1 ”Power supply” and Z2--5.2 “Backpanel Basic rack-2Z”.
J
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
X51
X4
Rel
ease
4
X2
Bucky/Tomo interface 2
Rel
ease
3
X1
Rel
ease
2
Rel
ease
1
X24X23
PTC
X22X21
Exte
rnal
APR
T
EXO
N
Tom
o tim
es
Tom
o tra
ject
orie
s
X4X3X2
Rel
ease
4
Bucky/Tomo interface 1
X52
PTC
X24X23X22X21
102Universal
I/O interface
Buck
y 2
X11
EXO
N
X12 X13
Tom
o tim
es
X14
Tom
o tra
ject
orie
s
Exte
rnal
APR
T
Buck
y 2
X11 X3
Buck
y 1
Option rack
CAN/XS-Bus
102Universal
I/O interface
or
WA
X52
for 4 aux. unitsAdaptor decade cable
CAN/XS-Bus
2 WA
W
Function unit ADAP bFunction unit ADAP a
X14X13
Buck
y 1
X12
Rel
ease
3
Rel
ease
2
Rel
ease
1
X1
EZX19
CAN/XS-Bus
Block diagramExpansions
Z1-1.2
Schr
./Kö
02-0
3-19
A1/A
3
4512 983 05751c Philips Medical Systems
(97.0)
Termination resistor
EZX45CAN/XS-BusX51 X52
EZX45or1WA X52
15 pin
2WA X52whoever is thelast in line
X42
Adaptor decade cable
26VDCX41
for 4 aux. units
X4226VDCEZX19
X41X42
1 WA for 4 aux. unitsAdaptor decade cable
102Universal
I/O interface
Function unit ADAP _a
Tom
o tim
es
X21
EXO
N
X14
Tom
o tra
ject
orie
s
X22X13
Exte
rnal
APR
T
X23
Bucky/Tomo interface 1
Buck
y 2
X12
PTC
X24
Buck
y 1
X11
Rel
ease
4
X4R
elea
se 3
X3
Rel
ease
2
X2
Rel
ease
1
X1
X51
EZX45
26VDCX41
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
EZ139
:4
Central unit
Discharging circuit
EQ/E2Q
42
47R34 R3 system resetRESET SW/
24V-/230V Low~ mA
L1
PEPE
N
L3
L2
47R
N
47RR1
RD MN ON/
EZX13:1
ready mains power on
AC 230V L2
EZX13:2
PW ON PO
EZX13:3
PW ON NGPO 12V +12V supply
MNON/ mains on
N
T1
K21
13 14
Adaptation K1
:2EZX15::1
RESET SW/ PW ON NG ST PH ID PW ON PO
EZ102EZ119
L2 L3
T1
L1
5A
low voltage
F3
supply(option) Control voltage
supply
EZX14:1 :2
Power supply
Z1-2.1
EN
X1:4
02-0
3-19
T2
T3
L2
T3L3L3
X1101X1102
F210A
L1
Mains supply
E
~
3 400V50, 60Hz
Stand (s)~3 400V
50, 60Hzmax. 5A
Schr
./Kö
A2/
A3
c
F1
MEX
MEX
Wall junction box
K1
L1
AC 230V L1
AC 0V XGEZX47:7 EZX47:2 EZX47:1
EZX44:14
EZX46:7
EZ130
PO 12V
K1
V9X3:2
V1
X1:2
V10T1X3:3
X1:7
X3:1
X1:6
MN EM OF
X1:5
V3
ST PH ID
EZX47:9
100circuit
Power on
:5
V2
912
3
R35K11
2
S1
5K11R1
R41K
K1
V6
100 m
C2V8 R5
V7
10K R6
H1
V5
1K
R2
V4
K1
15R
kV Control
65/80kW=40A
L1
T1 T2 T3
K2
41
2
1
4
33
3
6
5
5
9
12
K1
X2:2
5
X2:1
K2
5K1
8
N
m47
X1:1
A1
A2
1
2
RC1A1
X1:9
A2
K2
C1
8
Mnemonic's
mains supply 0V X-ray generatorAC 0V XGmains supply 230V AC phase 1AC 230V L1mains supply 230V AC phase 2AC 230V L2
GND 12V ground +12V supply50kW=25A
MN EM OF mains power emergency off2T1
DC supply relay power on -
RD MN ON/
OFF
MN ON/
EZX46:15
Emergency
EZX4:2
EZX46:14
EZX4:1
EZX46:6
EZX47:6
EZX44:6
GND 12V
DC supply relay power on +
(97.0)Philips Medical Systems
4512 983 05761
6
L3
4
L2
T2
23
3
kV Power unit
R224
EYA
L2 L3
WGRotor control
T2
N
EWN
T3
L3 N
Tube extension(option)
DeskC
ONOFF
Second
(option)
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
EZ139
:4
Central unit
Discharging circuit
EQ/E2Q
42
47R34 R3 system resetRESET SW/
24V-/230V Low~ mA
L1
PEPE
N
L3
L2
47R
N
47RR1
RD MN ON/
EZX13:1
ready mains power on
AC 230V L2
EZX13:2
PW ON PO
EZX13:3
PW ON NGPO 12V +12V supply
MNON/ mains on
N
T1
K21
13 14
Adaptation K1
:2EZX15::1
RESET SW/ PW ON NG ST PH ID PW ON PO
EZ102EZ119
L2 L3
T1
L1
5A
low voltage
F3
supply(option) Control voltage
supply
EZX14:1 :2
for digital DIAGNOST
Z1-2.1.1
EN
X1:4
02-0
3-19
T2
T3
L2
T3L3L3
X1101X1102
F210A
L1
Mains supply
E
~
3 400V50, 60Hz
Stand (s)mains supply 230V AC
50, 60Hzmax. 5A
Schr
./Kö
A2/
A3
c
F1
MEX
MEX
Wall junction box
K1
L1
AC 230V L1
AC 0V XGEZX47:7 EZX47:2 EZX47:1
EZX44:14
EZX46:7
EZ130
PO 12V
K1
V9X3:2
V1
X1:2
V10T1X3:3
X1:7
X3:1
X1:6
MN EM OF
X1:5
V3
ST PH ID
EZX47:9
100circuit
Power on
:5
V2
912
3
R35K11
2
S1
5K11R1
R41K
K1
V6
100 m
C2V8 R5
V7
10K R6
H1
V5
1K
R2
V4
K1
15R
kV Control
65/80kW=40A
L1
T1 T2 T3
K2
41
2
1
4
33
3
6
5
5
9
12
K1
X2:2
5
X2:1
K2
5K1
8
N
m47
X1:1
A1
A2
1
2
RC1A1
X1:9
A2
K2
C1
8
Mnemonic's
mains supply 0V X-ray generatorAC 0V XGmains supply 230V AC phase 1AC 230V L1mains supply 230V AC phase 2AC 230V L2
GND 12V ground +12V supply50kW=25A
MN EM OF mains power emergency off2T1
DC supply relay power on -
RD MN ON/
OFF
MN ON/
EZX46:15
Emergency
EZX4:2
EZX46:14
EZX4:1
EZX46:6
EZX47:6
EZX44:6
GND 12V
DC supply relay power on +
(02.0)Philips Medical Systems
4512 983 05951
6
L3
4
L2
T2
23
3
kV Power unit
R224
EYA
L2 L3
WGRotor control
T2
N
EWN
T3
L3 N
Tube extension(option)
DeskC
ONOFF
Second
(option) Power supply
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
:2EZX15:1:2EZX14:1
EZX13:3
EZX13:2
..03
..11
..08
T3
..05
..02
L3
L3
..04
..12
..09
..06
..03
X1102X1101
400V
440V
460V
480V
L1
..02
Low
K1
TX1206
Thermo fuse
GND 12V
TX1205
X2:1
5
X2:2
47RR1
5 12
14K213
EZX46:7
PO 12V
RESET SW/
m
EPE
L3 T3
PE
T2
X1103
X1102 L2
L3
L2
6
5
N
AC 230V L1
AC 0V XG
AC 230V L2
L3
PW ON NG
EZX47:9
X1:9
K1
2 1
100Power on
t
K2
N
EZX44:6
X1:1
EZX44:14
EZX47:1
N
with mains transformer
kV Control
:4
EZ130
:5
EN
Power supply
PW ON POSI PH ID
A1
A2
T1L1
T
L1
33 34 R3
41
47R
42
kV Power unitEQ/E2Q
L2
Discharging circuit
WN
Z = 20 m at 50 HziZ = 23 m at 60 Hzi
T3T2T1
F35A
24 R23
47R
4
23
56
X3:1
t
X3:3
Thermo fuse
Connected accordingto mains voltage.
T1 V10
V9 15R
X1:6
R35K11
EZX46:14EZX46:15 EZX46:6
EZX47:7
EZX4:1
EZX47:6
OFFEmergency
EZX47:2
X1:2
V1
K1 V247m
C1
EZX13:1
100
C2
circuit
PW ON NG
X3:2
PW ON PO
L3
RD MN ON/
10A
RESET SW/ready mains power on
X1:5
Surge arrester
Mains supply
Mnemonic's
AC 230V L1 mains supply 230V AC phase 1AC 230V L2
Stand (s)
max. 5A
Philips Medical Systemsc
4512 983 05941
Schr
./Kö
SI PH ID
system reset
L3 N
single phase identifier
10K R6
H1
1K R4R1
5K11
R2
V4
8 8
(option)
K19 K2
Adaptation
65/80kW=40AK1L1
X1101
1
A1 RC1A2 2
ONOFF
Wall junction box50kW=25A
mains supply 0V X-ray generatorAC OV XG
mains supply 230V AC phase 2
ground +12V supplyGND 12V3 400V...480V
~
50, 60Hz
mains power emergency offMN EM OFmains onMNON/
PO 12V +12V supplyDC supply relay power on -DC supply relay power on +
V3
X1:4
MEX
T2
T3
MEX
N
T1
F1
L2
PE
L3
L1
N
1
2
T1
L1
3
4
..10
..07
..04
TX 1101
T2
L2
L2
Z1-2.2
EZX4:2
(97.1)
A2/
A3
L2L1
02-0
3-19
K2
50, 60Hz~3 400V
F2
TX1201
mAEZ119 EZ102
supplyControl voltage
~(option)
24V-/230V
RD MN ON/
EWNSecond
MN ON/
supplylow voltage
WG
(option)Tube extension K1
EYA
EZ139
Rotor control
Central unit
CDesk
9
3
K112
S12
V6
X1:7
V7R51K
V5
V8
MN EM OF
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
:2EZX15:1:2EZX14:1
EZX13:3
EZX13:2
..03
..11
..08
T3
..05
..02
L3
L3
..04
..12
..09
..06
..03
X1102X1101
400V
440V
460V
480V
L1
..02
Low
K1
TX1206
Thermo fuse
GND 12V
TX1205
X2:1
5
X2:2
47RR1
5 12
14K213
EZX46:7
PO 12V
RESET SW/
m
EPE
L3 T3
PE
T2
X1103
X1102 L2
L3
L2
6
5
N
AC 230V L1
AC 0V XG
AC 230V L2
L3
PW ON NG
EZX47:9
X1:9
K1
2 1
100Power on
t
K2
N
EZX44:6
X1:1
EZX44:14
EZX47:1
N
with mains transformer
kV Control
:4
EZ130
:5
EN
Power supply
PW ON POSI PH ID
A1
A2
T1L1
T
L1
33 34 R3
41
47R
42
kV Power unitEQ/E2Q
L2
Discharging circuit
WN
Z = 20 m at 50 HziZ = 23 m at 60 Hzi
T3T2T1
F35A
24 R23
47R
4
23
56
X3:1
t
X3:3
Thermo fuse
Connected accordingto mains voltage.
T1 V10
V9 15R
X1:6
R35K11
EZX46:14EZX46:15 EZX46:6
EZX47:7
EZX4:1
EZX47:6
OFFEmergency
EZX47:2
X1:2
V1
K1 V247m
C1
EZX13:1
100
C2
circuit
PW ON NG
X3:2
PW ON PO
L3
RD MN ON/
10A
RESET SW/ready mains power on
X1:5
Surge arrester
Mains supply
Mnemonic's
AC 230V L1 mains supply 230V AC phase 1AC 230V L2
Stand (s)
max. 5A
Philips Medical Systemsc
4512 983 05961
Schr
./Kö
SI PH ID
system reset
L3 N
single phase identifier
10K R6
H1
1K R4R1
5K11
R2
V4
8 8
(option)
K19 K2
Adaptation
65/80kW=40AK1L1
X1101
1
A1 RC1A2 2
ONOFF
Wall junction box50kW=25A
mains supply 0V X-ray generatorAC OV XG
mains supply 230V AC phase 2
ground +12V supplyGND 12V3 400V...480V
~
50, 60Hz
mains power emergency offMN EM OFmains onMNON/
PO 12V +12V supplyDC supply relay power on -DC supply relay power on +
V3
X1:4
MEX
T2
T3
MEX
N
T1
F1
L2
PE
L3
L1
N
1
2
T1
L1
3
4
..10
..07
..04
TX 1101
T2
L2
L2
Z1-2.2.1
EZX4:2
(02.0)
A2/
A3
L2L1
02-0
3-20
K2
50, 60Hzmains supply 230V AC
F2
TX1201
mAEZ119 EZ102
supplyControl voltage
~(option)
24V-/230V
RD MN ON/
EWNSecond
MN ON/
supplylow voltage
WG
(option)Tube extension K1
EYA
EZ139
Rotor control
Central unit
CDesk
9
3
K112
S12
V6
X1:7
V7R51K
V5
V8
MN EM OF
for digital DIAGNOST
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
EZX2
1:1
EZX3
1:3
EZX4
1:6
EZX3
1:4
EZX4
1:5
EZX2
2:1
EZX3
2:6
EZX3
2:5
EZX3
1:11
EZX2
2:6
EZX2
2:4
EZX3
1:12
RM
DR
CT
Doo
r
cool
ing
unit
door
con
tact
(02.0)
read
y
(Opt
ion)
LS R
otor
con
trol
Philips Medical Systems
- cha
mbe
r vol
tage
400
V D
C
Schr
./Kö
02-0
4-18
A1/A
3
c
EZX2
1:4
EZX5
1:9
X1:C
25
SEL
CH
NO
NE/
- +
400V
9890
000
023
32 /
4512
108
090
4x
Offs
et m
emor
y 15V
5
40V
or
15V
X1:C
3
FD C
CH
1
FD L
CH
1
Adap
ter f
or A
MPL
IMAT
cab
le (n
ot fo
r OPT
IMU
S C
)
AMPL
IMA
Tin
terfa
ce
PO 1
5/40
VX5
-SE
L_ C
H1.
..5type
cont
rol
cham
ber
W1
SIG
N C
H3
RF
0V C
H3
X1:C
13
X1:C
14
Chamber control (transistor or CMOS)
EZX3
1:7
EZX3
1:8
3
Chamber selection
X2:A
3
X5X6
X2:C
3
CAN
L
CAN
H
Supp
ress
or
X2:C
7
X2:C
6
X2:A
6
EN X
C/
XRG - Bus
CTR
L X
C/
RES
ET__
C/
EZX2
1:3
EZX2
1:12
EZX2
1:11
X1:A
26
X1:A
25
SIG
N C
H1
inte
rface
Low
spe
ed ro
tor c
ontro
lR
C R
D/
X1:C
29
X1:A
29
CAN
- an
noun
cem
ent
Wat
ch d
og e
rror
Rea
dy
CM
SW
SW U
N E
X
K1
+
Mai
n co
ntro
ller
X1:C
07
X1:C
26
1 553 322 4 44
EZ13
9
1 2 3 4 5
EZX2
1:13
1EZ
X22:
132
EZX3
1:13
3EZ
X32:
134
EZX4
1:13
5
EZX4
1:11
2 3
EZX3
2:4
EZX3
2:3
EZX3
2:12
EZX4
1:12
EZX4
1:3
EZX4
1:4
EZX2
2:12
1
EZX2
2:11
EZX2
2:3
EZX3
2:11
EZX2
2:5
15
EZX5
1:1
C
RL
5 6 7
1...5
cham
ber
Mea
surin
g
12 13EZ
X31
EZX3
2EZ
X41
from
"Rea
dy"
8 11 12
FD R
Cen
tral u
nit
X1:C
4
EZ15
0 L N P1)
Basi
c in
terfa
ce
DS
MC
SG
X4 PO 4
00V
10K
A D
10K
PO 1
5/40
V
GN
D
NG
15V
C
+15VX3
-
W2
+
PNL5 13 6
X1:A
4
X1:A
5
X1:A
6
FD C
CH
2
X1:C
9
FD R
CH
2
X1:C
10
REL
CH
2
X1:C
11
X1:C
12
X1:A
9
FD L
CH
3
FD C
CH
3
FD R
CH
3
REL
CH
3
FD L
CH
4
DS
MC
0V
X2:A
16
+15V
REL
CH
5
FD R
CH
5
FD C
CH
5
X1:C
18
W3
FD L
CH
5
X1:C
17
REL
CH
4
X1:C
16
FD R
CH
4
X1:C
15
PO 1
5/40
V
FD C
CH
4
X1:A
12
X1:A
20
X1:A
11
X1:A
10
X1:C
1X1
:A1
only
451
2 10
8 05
963
X2:C
16
right
fiel
d m
easu
ring
cham
ber 1
...5
X4 X6
"
X5 H1
RES
ET F
U
room
doo
r con
tact
EZ15
0
sele
ct c
ham
ber 1
...5
DS
MC
0V
cham
ber n
ot s
elec
ted
EN X
C/
radi
atio
n in
dica
tion
DS
MC
SG
cham
ber
stat
us
Mea
surin
g
from
ear
th
Sign
al g
roun
d
Mea
sure
men
t of
AMPL
IMAT
ram
p.
shou
ld b
e is
olat
ed
L
EZX3
1:6
EZX2
1:6
EZX3
1:5
EZX2
1:5
EZX4
1:1
EZX3
2:1
EZX3
1:1
sign
al m
easu
ring
cham
ber
room
doo
r con
tact
0V
sign
al m
easu
ring
cham
ber 1
...5
rele
ase
cham
ber
"
+40V
sup
ply
+26V
sup
ply
roto
r con
trol o
n
+15V
sup
ply
roto
r con
trol r
eady
+15/
40V
supp
ly
roto
r con
trol s
tato
r 2
"
0V re
fere
nce
valu
e m
easu
ring
cham
ber
"
0V re
fere
nce
valu
e m
easu
ring
cham
ber 1
...5
rele
ase
(rese
t int
egra
tor)
cham
ber 1
...5
1 2
Tube
ext
ensi
on
Rad
iatio
n in
dica
tion
LS R
otor
con
trol
(Opt
ion)
(Opt
ion)
PH
R
E JN
Cen
tral u
nit
3 PL
US
1) =
451
2 10
8 09
042
EZX1
:6
EZX1
:4
EZX1
6:1
EZX1
6:2
X2:A
C11
X2:A
C12
X2:A
C1
RF
0V
X2:A
C2
FD L
FD C
X2:A
C4
test
sig
nal
X2:A
C5
REL
PO 4
00V
SIG
N
EZ13
9
X2:A
C14
PO 2
6V
supp
lyLo
w v
olta
ge
NG
15V
EZ10
2
X4
5 13 6 3 4
1
1
11
7
3 4 8
Basic interface
Z1-6
FD R
CH
1
REL
CH
1
FD L
FD C
FD R
RF
0V8 11 12
REL
CH
J A D
REL
CH
5
SIG
N C
H5
RF
0V C
H5
x 1
or
4
RF
0V C
H4
X1:C
20
X1:C
19
SIG
N C
H4
X1:A
14
X1:A
13
X1:C
18
X1:C
5
X1:C
6 J A D H E C R
REL
PO 4
00V
SIG
N
3 4 1 7
H E C R
DR
C S
W
with
sof
twar
e pr
ogra
mm
ing
X1:A
15
"AM
PLIM
AT s
ensi
tivity
"
X1:A
16
X7
Phot
osen
sor/a
mpl
imat
inpu
t
EZX2
1:7
CU
CT1
2
rd
CU
CT1
1
H1
RM
DR
0V
EZX4
5:8
WB
X51:
8W
BX2
2:8
RC
ST
3/
RC
ST
2/
RC
ON
/
X1:A
3FD
L C
H2
SIG
N C
H2
Selft
est
X1:A
7
Star
t
RF
0V C
H2
X1:A
82
STAT
US
EZX2
2:7
EZX2
2:8
RF
0V C
H1
EZX2
1:8
1
cool
ing
unit
inte
rface
Roo
m a
nd
X1:C
22EZ
X2:7
X1:A
22EZ
X2:6
X1:C
28EZ
X1:1
0
X1:A
28EZ
X1:8
X1:C
08
X8G
ND
W1
=
+40V
=
W2
-15V
+15V 989
0 00
0 02
331/
4512
108
083
01
EZX2
1EZ
X22
= ga
in fa
ctor
1
supp
ly v
olta
ge fo
r cha
mbe
r am
plifi
er =
15V
= tra
nsis
tor d
river
Def
ault
prog
ram
min
g:
X6
mus
t be
set i
n ac
cord
ancex 1
1W
4
xx
1 o
r 4
gain
EZX3
2:8
EZX3
2:7
4
W1.
..W4
and
40V
gene
ratio
n fro
m 4
512
108
0596
4 on
war
ds.
NG
15V
X1 X3 X2
3ON
OFF
ON
Rem
arks
:
W1:
W2:
W3:
W4:
CM
SW
L
C
R
- pow
er s
uppl
y
- exp
osur
e co
mm
and
- fie
ld s
elec
tion
CTR
L X
C/
CU
CT1
11
2
DS
MC
0V
DS
MC
SG
EN X
C/
"
NG
15V
PO 5
VPO
15V
FD C
CH
1...5
cool
ing
unit
cont
act 1
1
FD L
CH
1...5
PO 2
6VPO
40V
FD R
CH
1...5
RC
ON
/
PO 4
00V
PO 1
5/40
V
-
RC
ST
2/ 3/
Dos
e m
easu
ring
cham
ber 0
V
SIG
N C
H
RF
0V C
HR
ESET
C/
REL
CH
1...5
RM
DR
0V
RM
DR
CT
Dos
e m
easu
ring
cham
ber s
igna
l
enab
le X
-ray
com
man
d
-15V
sup
ply
SW U
N E
X
SEL
CH
1...5
RF
0V C
H1.
..5
+5V
supp
ly
SIG
N C
H1.
..5
"
SEL
CH
NO
NE/
cent
re fi
eld
mea
surin
g ch
ambe
r 1...
5le
ft fie
ld m
easu
ring
cham
ber 1
...5
X3
+400
V su
pply
mea
surin
g ch
ambe
r
cont
rol X
-ray
com
man
d
RC
RD
/
CAN
LC
AN H
com
mon
for r
adia
tion
indi
catio
nge
nera
tor C
AN lo
w
REL
CH
gene
rato
r CAN
hig
h
Mne
mon
ic's
3
1...5
cham
bers
Mea
surin
g
-+
+5V
x
+5V
x 4
PO 5
V
NG
15V
PO 1
5V
EZX4
1:8
from
EZX4
1:7
EZX4
1:4
5
-15V
+26V
SIG
N C
H
RF
0V C
H
+15V
4512 983 05531
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
1)
EY100X3
High speed
X12
rotor control
X11X11
controlX15X14X14 control
1)
X14W1
Soldering link
(tube 3)
X62
X67
K1
1WG
K5
Tube extension
X57N
X61
X72
ENF3:L3
1) Connect here iflow speed rotorcontrol is present
ENX1101
X83
X84
WGTube extension
K122
K111
WG
Statorconnectorstube
Ost
./Kö
(b/98.0)
02-0
3-19
A2/
A3
Philips Medical Systemsc
Tube supervision
X1
Cooling unit control 2
3rd tube in room 2
K2
X13
X5
K3
X3
K3
W1
EZX3
K11 K12
EZX2
Hardware programming
EZX16
EZ150
Soldering link
Room decade 2
K5
X11
X57
Z1-14.1
GWBH.V. changeover switch
Tube extension overview
X1101
X1102
X1103
X84
2WG
X83
Tube extension
X81
X82
X68
X67
K5
X62
X72
X65
X57
X84
Room decade 1
X64
X83
K1
X52
tube 2
X81
X3
X82
K12
X2
X68
X5
Room decade 3
X7
X4
Tube extensions for 3 tubes
K1 K2
EZX11
(tube 3)
EZX16
EZ130
EY100X3
kV control
EZ150
Tube 1+3 Tube 2
Basis interface
Tube 1+2 Tube 3
rotor controlTube 1
High speed
Tube 2+3
Tube 1 Tube 2
Room 1 Room 2 Room 3 cable soldering soldering1WGX13-2WGX13 link 2WGWlink 1WGW
-Tube 3 XX
X XX
-X X
X --
K5
K12K11
X3
Cooling unit
K3X1
K3
Room decade
K5K2K1
tube2
K1
tube3
K2
tube1
K1
tube2/3
K2
EGH.V. generator
ENX1101
K12K1131
K12
2WG
K112
1WG
Statorconnectorstube
X13
X14W1
Soldering linkX11
X52 X65
X4EZX2K5
X6
X7
X5
EZX3
Cooling unit
Cooling unit 1
Cooling unit 2
EZX1
K2
X8
K11
K12
X51~
X9
230V
Room decade 2
Tube supervision 1
X2
N
X9
X8
X6
K12
X2
K11
X7
X4
X1EZX1
K2
Rotor controlStator supply 1
K12
K5
Stator supply 2
K3
K11
Tube supervision
Tube supervision 2
K3K5K2K1
Room decade
Room decade 1
Stator supply 2
X61
ENF3:L3X63
X51
X64
~
Rotor control
Basis interface
EZ130
kV control
Tube extension for 2 tubes
Stator supply 3
Tube supervision 2
X51
K11
X61
Stator supply 1
X63
X9
X8
Tube supervision 3
X6
Tube supervision 1
Cooling unit control 3
Cooling unit control 1
EG
230V
or H.V. change overswitch GWB
X81
H.V. generatorX82
tube2
K5
tube1
K2
X68
X72
X67
K1X62
X63
X65X52
X64
K1
EZX11
4512 983 05541
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
RM
DR
0V
RM
DR
CT
2C
M S
WSW
UN
EX
2
SW U
N E
X 1
GND
TB 3
/
Coo
ling
unit
2/3
PO 1
5V 2
GND
TH O
L 1
CM
TH
TH O
L SW
1
CM
TH
SW
PO 2
6V 1
X8:1
0
Tube
sup
ervi
sion
1
X15:
1
X12:
4
X8:9
X5:9
X5:1
0
X5:8
X5:7
X6:3
X5:6
X6:6
X5:3
X6:7
X6:8
X6:9
X8:3
X8:4
X8:6
X8:7
X6:1
0
X3:1
0
X3:6
X3:4
X2:9
X2:6
X2:4
X2:1
0
X2:8
X2:5
X3:8
X3:5
X3:9
X1:8
W1
X1:1
0X1
:5X1
:9
Sold
erin
g lin
k
stat
or 1
A1
A1stat
or 2
/3
X4:3
X4:6
X4:7
V6
X4:8
X4:9
A2
V7A
2
X7:3
X7:4
X7:9
K3
X12:
2
K5
K2
TH O
L 2
CM
TH
TH O
L SW
2
CM
TH
SW
GND
PO 2
6V 2
tube
1
Tube
sup
ervi
sion
2/3
CM
SW
CM
TH
Mne
mon
ic's
:
X1:4
X9:4
X9:6
X9:3
X9:7
X9:9
GND
X9:1
0
X61
X62
X63
SW C
U2 O
N
Coo
ling
unit
1
CU
CT1
2
X7:1
0
CU2
CT1
1PO
26V
K1
K5
GND
PO 1
5V 1
SW C
U1 O
N
Roo
m d
ecad
e 2/
3
CU
CT1
2
X64
CU1
CT1
1PO
26V
X7:7
X65
Roo
m d
ecad
e 1
X51
GND
1 2
CU
CT1
1
CU2
CT1
1
EXON
PO 1
5V 1
PO 1
5V 2
PO 2
6V 2
switc
h co
olin
g un
it 1 o
n
RC
ST
2/
switc
h co
olin
g un
it 2 o
n
V4R
3R
2
tube
hou
sing
ove
rload
R1
tube
hou
sing
ove
rload
1
tube
hou
sing
ove
rload
sw
itch
tube
hou
sing
ove
rload
sw
itch
1
B1
2
V5
2TH
OL
1
X12:
03
TH O
L SW
X57
X72
STU
Rot
or co
ntro
l
WG / 1WG / 2WGTube extension
Z1-14.2
2 4 6
1 3 5
K11
2
1
4
3
6
5
K12
X84
X82
PO 1
5V
CU C
T1 1
PO 2
6V ~L3
(230
V )
PO 1
5VCU
CT1
2
X4:1
0
GN
DPO
26V
RM
DR
0V
RM
DR
CT
SW U
N E
X
RC S
T 3/
GN
D
tube
2/3
PO 2
6VPO
26V
1
PO 1
5V
N
Stat
or s
uppl
y 1
RM
DR
CT
CU1
CT1
1
RM
DR
0V
RM
DR
CT
1R
M D
R C
T 2
STU
Stat
or s
uppl
y 2/3
STV
STW
TB 3
RT/
SW C
U1 O
NSW
CU2
ON
SW U
N E
XSW
UN
EX
1
TB 2
/
SW U
N E
X 2
TB 3
/
TB 2
RT/
TB 2
RT/
TH O
LTB
3 R
T/
Ack
now
ledg
emen
tvi
a se
lect
ion
ofw
ork
stat
ion
TH O
L SW
1
STV
GN
D
PO 2
6V
CM T
H S
W
TH O
L SW
CM
TH
TH O
L
Coo
ling
unit
cont
rol
CM
SW
X11:
5
stat
or 2
/3
GN
D
TB 3
/
tube
2/3
24V,
5W
A1/A
302
-03-
19O
st.K
ö
c Philips Medical Systems
Con
trol
PO 2
6V
(c/97.1)
TB 2
/
Roo
m d
ecad
e
RC S
T 2/
Tube
sup
ervi
sion
PO 2
6V
X7:6
X52
X11:
3
X11:
6
STW
RC
ST
3/
CM
SW
RM
DR
CT
1
RM
DR
0V
PO 2
6VG
ND
24V
DC
, max
. 3W
PO 2
6V
door
cont
act
EXO
Nin
dica
tion
24V
DC
, max
. 3W
2
2
31 2
indi
catio
nEX
ON
K3
K4
X41
X11:
2
K1
X11:
1
K2
K2
door
cont
act
24V,
5W
15V
supp
ly
26V
supp
ly
expo
sure
on
tube
2tu
be 3
stat
or li
ne U
stat
or li
ne V
stat
or li
ne W
tube
3 re
turn
com
mon
tube
hou
sing
tube
2 re
turn
room
doo
r con
tact
cool
ing
unit c
onta
ct 1
1
15V
supp
ly o
ptio
nal 1
15V
supp
ly o
ptio
nal 2
26V
supp
ly o
ptio
nal 1
room
doo
r con
tact
1
cool
ing
unit 1
con
tact
1 1
26V
supp
ly o
ptio
nal 2
room
doo
r con
tact
2
cool
ing
unit 2
con
tact
1 1
roto
r con
trol
sta
tor 2
room
doo
r con
tact
0V
3/
com
mon
tube
hou
sing
sw
itch
com
mon
for r
adia
tion
indi
catio
n
X68
X69
X83
CM
TH
SW
C1
tube
1
X81
X67
X13:
1
X43
K11
K12 X4
2
K4
X13:
2
V1
tube
2/3
K5
X11:
4
V2
X14:
1X1
4:2
V3
room
2/3
X12:
1
X1:6
4512 983 05551
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
X1:C
27SL
TO
TM
8
X1:A
27SL
TO
TM
7
X1:C
26SL
TO
TM
6
X1:A
26
X1:C
25
SL T
O T
M 5
X1:A
25
SL T
O T
M 4
10tra
ject
orie
s
WA / 1WA / 2WAAdapter 4 auxil. units
Z1-15.1
X2:A
9
X2:C
9
CO
M E
X C
D
X1:A
24
X1:C
24
EX C
D
IT 0
V
SL T
O T
M 1
SL T
O T
M 2
SL T
O T
M 3
K18
10R
EX O
N
X1:C
19
X1:A
12
X1:C
12
SW B
U 1
SW B
U 2
4 5 8
10
9
8 9
X1:A
21
X14
1 2 3
X13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X AC
T/
EX C
D
t
500.
..600
ms
RQ
PQ
/
EXO
N
t
X1:A
10
4
3
4
X1:A
4
4
X1:C
6
3 4
X1:C
8
PO 2
6V R
E
X1:C
10
X1:A
C1
6 7 10
X1:C
205 6 7 82 3 4
codi
ng
gene
rato
r CAN
hig
h ac
tive
gene
rato
r CAN
low
act
ive
Expa
nsio
ns
GN
D S
or P
O 0
V
NR
PR
X/
PO 2
6V
expo
sure
end
grou
nd
com
mon
for e
xpos
ure
end
expo
sure
on
PO 2
6V R
E
RES
ET C
/
sign
al b
us e
nabl
e X-
ray
RQ
PR
/R
G D
V 1.
..4
sign
al b
us X
-ray
requ
est c
omm
and
RQ
PR
HS
sign
al b
us g
roun
d
+26V
sup
ply
emitt
er 0
V ex
posu
re o
n si
gnal
+26V
sup
ply
reve
rse
not r
eady
pre
parin
g fo
r X-ra
y
regi
stra
tion
devi
cesy
stem
RES
ET c
omm
and
requ
est p
repa
ratio
n
SW T
O 1
SW S
F C
F 2
SW T
O 2
TOM
O P
GTO
PG
1...
8TO
PG
SL
(SW
pro
gram
mab
le in
Dat
a Se
t A)
requ
est p
repa
ratio
n fro
m h
ands
witc
h
X AC
T/
V15
S or
PO
V
requ
est X
-ray
gene
rato
r for
exp
osur
e
switc
h bu
cky
2
XG R
D E
X 1.
..4
requ
est X
-ray
gene
rato
r for
fluo
rosc
opy
switc
h to
mog
raph
y 1
tom
o pr
ogra
m
switc
h to
mog
raph
y 2
sele
ct X
-ray
gene
rato
r for
tom
ogra
phy
tom
o m
ode
prog
ram
med
tom
o pr
ogra
m s
elec
ted
sign
al b
us +
15V
supp
ly
sign
al b
us X
-ray
activ
e
switc
h si
de fi
eld
to c
entra
l fie
ld b
ucky
mea
surin
g ch
ambe
r 1sw
itch
side
fiel
d to
cen
tral f
ield
buc
ky m
easu
ring
cham
ber 2
X-ra
y ge
nera
tor r
eady
for e
xpos
ure
requ
est
10
X1:A
13
X2:A
25R
Q S
N X
/
K13
PO 2
6V
RQ
XG
PR
1
RQ
XG
PR
2
RQ
XG
PR
3
RQ
XG
PR
4
X41:
1 PO 2
6V
CTR
L X/
RD
PR
X
X2:C
25
EN X
/N
R P
R X
/X2
:C26
W1
Selft
est
Star
t
Rea
dy
Erro
r
CAN
- an
noun
cem
ent
+m
ax.:
26V
1
10m
A
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Tom
o
X22
Tom
o tim
es
35
Form
at
6 7
(97.0)
8 9 10
X1:C
31
ADAP
_ b
ADAP
_ a
ADAP
_ a
===
2WA
1WA
WA
Func
tion
unit
Philips Medical Systems
Rel
ease
con
trol
(gal
vani
c de
coup
led)
1
2X23
4 5 6 7 8 9
SLPG
1
SLPG
2
SLPG
3
SLPG
4
SLPG
5
SLPG
6
6 7
Schr
./Kö
A1/A
3
Rel
ease
1(5
)
X2R
elea
se 2
(6)
c
Rel
ease
3(7
)
X3
)
Rel
ease
4(8
)
from
451
2 10
8 08
043
onw
ards
:- K
1 in
XG
RD
EX c
ircui
t
- sig
nal E
X C
D a
dded
K1V9
max
. 26V
,5A
1 3 10
+
+26V
GN
D2
RQ
PR
HS
RQ
XG
PR
02-0
3-19
X1 1
- V9
: max
. I in
crea
sed
from
1A
to 5
A
X1:A
3
+5V
8 9
K1
K14
K15
X1:C
4
Rel
ease
1...
4
K16
X1:A
7
RG
DV
1
K17
X1:A
9
X1:A
11
X1:A
5
5
8 9
X2:A
C14
V15
SPO
V
DC
GN
D S
X2:A
C15
PO 0
V
DC
CAN
H
CAN
L
RES
ET C
/
X2:A
C27
CO
D 1
CO
D 2
CO
D 3
+15V
X2:C
3
X2:A
3
X2:A
6
X2:A
21
X2:C
21
X2:A
22
Buck
y 2(
4)
X12
open
ed:
X11
1
2 3 4
SW S
F C
F 1
SW S
F C
F 2
Test
PR
EP
S2
Test
FLU
OR
O
S1
X1:A
30
X1:C
30
X21
TO P
G 1
TO P
G 2
TO P
G 3
TO P
G 4
TO P
G 5
TO P
G 6
TO P
G 7
X1:C
13
X1:A
14
X1:C
14
X1:A
15
X1:C
15
X1:A
16
SL P
G 7
X1:C
16
X1:A
17
X1:C
17
X41:
2
X52
W2
W1
W2
W3
requ
est s
ynch
roni
zatio
nR
Q S
N X
/R
Q X
G E
XR
Q X
G F
LR
Q X
G P
R1.
..4
inte
rface
K5 K4 K7 K6
PO 2
6VX AC
T/ W12
W13
GN
D 2
X42:
2
7
RG
DVS
L(n)
RG
DVS
L(m
)
WA
or 1
WA
2WA
I/O
Bidi
rect
iona
l
inte
rface
stat
us
X1:A
28
X1:C
28
X1:A
31
H1
K9
X1:A
18
X1:A
20
X1:C
18
X1:A
19
SL X
G T
O
SW T
O 1
SW T
O 2
9
EXO
N
1010
CM
EX
SW 1
clos
ed:
CM
EX
SW 2
CM
EX
SW 3
CM
EX
SW 4
X1:C
11
TO P
G 1
...8
K12
TO P
G S
L
RG
DV
2
RG
DV
35
RG
DV
45
RQ
XG
FL
6
GN
D 2
6 7
6 7 9
8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5PTC
X24
SL P
G 1
TOM
O P
G
SL P
G 2
SL P
G 3
TO P
G S
L
SL P
G 4
SL P
G 5
SL P
G 6
PO 2
6V
PO 2
6V
SL C
O 1
SL C
O 2
WA
1WA X5
1X4 1
1R
Q X
G E
X1
TO P
G 8
Exte
rnal
APR
T
K3
C75
I/O brai
n
X2:A
C28
2
Tom
o
X1:A
C2
X1:C
5
X1:C
7
X1:C
9
K14.
..K17
K4...
K11
K1R
Q P
R/
RQ
XG
FL
+26V
2 4 5 6 7 8 9
K2
GN
D2
W3
K8 K11
K10
K12
CAN
/XS
bus
PO 2
6V R
E
X42:
1
5
for
for
EZX4
5/
orEZ
X19
EZX4
5or
/W
NX2
1
1WA
X42
/ 1
WA
X52
for
2W
A
X2:A
24
X2:C
24
RQ
PR
/
sele
ct c
orre
ctio
n 1
(thic
knes
s)se
lect
cor
rect
ion
2 (th
ickn
ess)
sele
ct e
xt A
PRT
prog
ram
sele
ct to
mo
time
switc
h bu
cky
1
requ
est X
-ray
gene
rato
r for
pre
para
tion
com
mon
for e
xpos
ure
switc
h of
regi
stra
tion
devi
ce
SL C
O 1
SL C
O 2
SL P
G 1
...8
SL T
O T
M 1
...8
SL X
G T
OSW
BU
1SW
BU
2SW
SF
CF
1
K14
X1:C
3XG
RD
EX
1
K15
X1:A
6XG
RD
EX
2
6 7 8 9 10
SL P
G 8
Tom
o m
ode
X1:A
32
2
2XG
RD
EX
3X1
:A8
K16
K17
Tom
o re
ady
Buck
y re
ady
X1:C
32
102
EXO
N
Uni
vers
al
Inte
rface
Log
ic
I/O in
terfa
ce
I/O
Bidi
rect
iona
l
K14
K15
K16
K17
X1:A
29
X1:C
29
CAN
HC
AN L
CO
D1.
..3
Mne
mon
ics
EN X
/
CTR
L X/
EX C
D
CO
M E
X C
D
EX O
N
W11
CM
EX
SW 1
...4
GN
D 2
IT 0
V
3
2
max
. I
= 1A
XG R
D E
X 4
3 8 10
Buck
y 1(
3)
1
cont
act
4512 983 05571
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
02-0
3-19
Basis rack-2 Z4512 108 0936.
Schr
./Kö
A1/A
3 Backpanel EZ
Philips Medical Systemsc
Z2-5.2(b/02.0)
V53
MN OFPO 0VV45 V46
PO 12V
RESET C/3
4
5
V47V49
3
412
513
614
715
8
Tube extension
5
6
2
41
3
24V74 V70 V71 V72 V73 V77
2
3
5
6
1 2
X3
PO 26V
X18
2
X1711
1
5
PO 26V 1
4
3
V5V4
PO 26V
V3
Operating panel
kV power unit EQ/E2Q
Tube supervision
2
1 4
1
2
X201
2
2
10
X191
9
V7
8
7
6
V6
X12H.V. generator
2513
V86 12
11
820
719
6
5
4
3
18
17
16
15
10
H.V. generator
X11
9
V19
10
V14
X ACT S/
CAN L
CAN H
X71CAN H
STOP X C/
RESET C/X73CTRL X C/X74
15
5
7
13
19 9
14
2
4
6
12 59
V32
I2 2
I2 3
I2 4
E PO CV2
CV2 GND
CV2 GND OLCV2 ID/
TP HT SG
TB CU FR PO
2
V36 V39
HT AN
12
13
14
3
15
4
5
X46
8
7
6
1
2
X14
3
135
124
3
AC 230V L2
1
AC 0V XG
AC 230V L12
X15
V65
14
12
V66
412
5
614
715
NG 15VPO 15V
MN ON
PO 5VCAN H PO 12V
7MN EM OF
8RD MN 0N MN EM OF
R32
switch on circuitEmergency OFF
815
714
6
1)15
14
13
12
8
7
6
11
5
4
103
91
V31 V33
CAN LCAN H
V40
Decade adapter WA/WB
V27 V23
Operating panel
EN X/
RQ SN X/NR PR X/
PO 15V
MN ON
AC 0V XG2
1X13
AC 0V XG
3
4
Operating panel,
X4X47
CAN PO 5V
Power supply
HT CA GNDHT AN GND
TP HT GND
TB CU FR NG
9
10
NG 15V
11
V24V34V28
PO 26V
16
2
AC 230V L1 AC 230V L1
11
210
19
CV2 65 ID/
X45
V35
CTRL X C/
V13 V15
X72
V17
EN X C/
X76
15
13
X52
CAN L
1
X ACT S/
62
RESET C/7
3
STOP X C/8
4
R2
CV2 EN/
V87
RX CAN 2
CAN HCAN L
V89 V91 V92 V93 V94
PO 15VPO 15V
RM DR CT
R1
PO V
V60 V57
X ACT/
CTRL X/
NR PR X/
V59
V55
RESET C/
V58
CAN L
4512 104 910224512 130 5444.
PO 5VCAN H
CAN L
RC ON/
8
7
6
5
2
1
13
2)
I1 4/
E NG CV1
CV1 TMCV1 OL
I2 1/
I2 2/
I2 3/
I2 4/E NG CV2
CV2 TM
CV2 SH
S CAN GND
I1 3/
I1 2/I1 1/
EN X/
PO 0V
RQ SN X/PW ON PO
SI PH/
PO 26V 1 PO 26V 1
kV power unit EQ
PO 26V
TB 2/
TB 2 RT/
TB 3/
TB 3 RT/
V21
21
22
HT CA
23
X351
PO 15V
I1 4
E PO CV1
CV1 ID/
CV1 GND OL
CV1 GNDCV1 EN/
CV1 65 ID/
V78
I2 1
kV power unit E2Q
V76 V75
I1 3
I1 2
I1 1
13
X34
12
14
11
18
17
14
16
15
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
1
2
2310
19
20
229
21V18 V22 V20
3
2
X81
11
10RESET C/
9RC RD/
1nF
130R
Termination resistor for X45
V11
V16
X77EN X C/
X75
for OPTIMUS C
To System CAN X432)
To Signal Bus X231)
1)
1)
2)
operating panel CwithFunction programming plug for X44
operating panel C
R/F
RX CAN 1
V62V67 V64
Rotor control 2
V63V61
RD MN ON
TH OL
CM TH
4512 104 9004.
X151
9 PW ON NG/
without
V48
RAD+CD
TH OL SW/
CM TH SW
X44
1
FI TF2 2FI TF1 2
FI TF2 1FI TF1 1
X6X51
2 2
X24
V88V90
MN ON
19
V69
2
11
10
24
S CAN PO
PO V
RESET SW/
4512 983 05511
34
125
136
147
158
11
210
19
Generator CAN termination plug
V12
V56
V54
R4
L2 L3
V10
V50 V51
For survey of the components see Z2-5.4
CAN move to WAX52 / WBX52
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Installation
(02.0) 4--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06091
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
3-1...3-2 (02.0)
Hardware programming
1. Hardware programming
1.1. Mains transformer (option)
In case of a present mainstransformer 4512 204 0010x in the generator,connect the primary end according to the ratedvoltage of the mains.Connect 400V mains systems up to the 480Vterminal.
Modify EMC filters EQ200 in the converterassemblies EQ / E2Q if the generator is operatedvia theoptional surgearrester ona groundeddeltamains.See service documentation for surge arrester andconverter R/F.
4512--983--06091
145H94
mains transformer(option)
480V
460V
440V
400V
F1:T1F1:T2F1:T3
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Installation OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--2 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06091
1.2. PCB EZ150 basic interface
NOTENever change jumper W1.
Voltage supply for the amplifiers of connectedmeasuring chambers:
Voltage\Soldering link EZ 150 W2 EZ 150 W3
15V default OFF ON
40V ON OFF
Working voltage range for ALC measuringchambers: 15 ... 45V
Working voltage range for hybrid measuringchambers: 40 ... 45V
ALC measuring chambers can be recognized by thecode No. 4512 104 xxxxx.
Hybrid measuring chambers are based on code No.4512 102/103 xxxxx.
Set thegain factor for AEC techniques with jumperEZ150:W4:
-- Factor 1 ==> W4 in position 3 = defaultFor screen/film combination with at least onesystem speed ≤ 200.
-- Factor 4 ==> W4 in position 1For screen/film combinations with all systemspeeds > 200.
The software programming has to be setaccordingly.
The rest of the generator hardware has beenproperly programmed at the factory.
If required, refer to subsystem manual OPTIMUSRAD section 5: PROGRAMMINGS.
J
195H96
Basic interfaceEZ 150
PCB layout print different from figure.
W1 do not change!
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Setting to work
(02.0) 4-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06341
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
4-1...4-4 (02.0)
Setting to work
Contents
1. Setting to work 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06341
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting to work bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)4--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06341
1. Setting to work
The system is delivered preassembled by the factory.
DWARNINGBefore switching on the X-ray generator:
Switch off the auxiliary mains breaker for table.For detailed information see manual installation of the
OPTIMUS X-ray generator.
Check the power supply for the table on the PCB SN.
DWARNING
Always remove cassette tray before you open the
tabetop. Tilting the tabletop with inserted tray will
cause damages to both table and cassette tray.
DWARNING
Tilting the tabletop beyond the upright positon can
cause damages to the cover of the table base.
For access to the table control unit:
Remove the cassette tray from the bucky.
Move the tabletop to its maximum front position.
Loosen 2 screws at the rear (1).
Tilt the tabletop unit as shown in figure 1.
Secure the tabletop by fixing the lever (2) via thescrew (3).
The table power supply must be 230 V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
NOTEThere is no programming for 50 or 60 Hz. The tablecan only operate with 230 V (and no with 110 V).
1
2
3
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Setting to work
(02.0) 4-3 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06341
Follow the setting-to-work procedure described in the manual OPTIMUS X-ray generator .
Programming
Select Registration Devices
-- RGDV1( = registration device for tables 1)
-- RGDV2( = registration device tomo)
-- RGDV3( = registration device wall stand)
-- RGDV4( = registration device free exposure)
After finishing thedescribed setting-to-work procedureof theOPTIMUSX-ray generator, check the functions belowon the table.
After switching on the auxiliary mains breaker for table
Check all functions on the table:
-- Green LED on the power pack is on.
-- The programmed language.
-- Function of foot-switch assembly.
-- Function of the rocker switches “table up/down”on both sides.
-- Function of end-switch upper position:Motor must stop before mechanical end positionis reached.
-- Function of end-switch lower position:Motor must stop before mechanical end positionis reached.
-- Function of safety switch:Apply about 20 kg of manpower against thetabletop during table down movement.
Check the strength of upward table movement.
Check whether the range of movement is 270 mm.
Check the movement of the bucky unit.
Check the functions of the column:
-- Function of catches in all directions.
-- Function of collimator light.
1
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting to work bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)4--4 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06341
Check the functions of the bucky unit:
-- bucky exposure delay
Check delay time of grid release with test exposuretime = 4 ... 6 msec.
There must not be any grid line visible.
NOTEThe X-ray tube was already adjusted at factory.
Do not ADAPT the X-ray tube.
In case the generator was not powered on during alonger period -- e.g. more than 2 months --, werecommend to recondition the X-ray tube. SeeOPTIMUS manual, section Installation, 10.1 Tubeconditioning.
Check coincidence of X-ray beam and light.
-- Make a test exposure.
Check alignment of the stand.
Check alignment of the bucky wall stand.J
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Setting to work
(02.0) 4-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06351
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
4-1...4-11 (02.0)
Z1-2.1 (99.0) A3 4512 983 06141
Adjustment procedure for tomo
Contents
1. Adjustment procedure for tomo 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Adjustment of the table level 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Correction for tomo layer height = fine adjustment under X-ray condition 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3. Adjustment of tomo layer height indication 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4. Setting the display language 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5. Adjustment of the tomo axis 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6. Alignment for center line = center of bucky 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7. Checking drive and position control switches 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Tomo adjustment under exposureconditions (tomo only) 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1. Measurement of X-ray zone 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2. Symmetry of tomo axis 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3. Tomography resolution test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4. Tomo layer height 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06351
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting to work bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)4--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06351
1. Adjustment procedure for tomo
1.1. Adjustment of the table level
Check whether the table-top is precisely levelled.Turn on light and laser beam.Adjust laser beam levelling:
- Raise the table to a position somewhat belowmaximum level. The distance from the laserbeam to front and to rear frame of the table-topmust be equal, i.e. the laser beam must beplane-parallel to the table-top.
- If not, turn laser diode slightly with adjustingscrew (1).
Raise table-top precisely to laser beam levelaccording to figure 1. Table-top position must beslightly below the maximum level that can bereached. If not, adjust laser diode height (2).
If not correct:
Open and secure the table-top. Set the upper liftlimit SNV-S7 switch so that the center of the pivotpoint meets the 0-level of the table-top.
1.2. Correction for tomo layer height =fine adjustment under X-ray condition
If a tomo test exposure (with a test phantom) deviatesfrom the tomo height, the correction can be done asfollows:
Solution 1 -- valid for table serial No.≥500If the 0mm layer height = the top of table-top differencesto the0point of the coupling element. The correctioncanbe done on the axis in both directions.
Solution 2 -- valid for table serial No.≤499Correct the tomo layer height = 0mm via the table heightSNVS7 switch = table height for the most upper tableposition. After the SNVS7 correction follow up withsection 1.3. Adjustment of tomo layer height.
Figure 1
AxisCoupling element
+/-- 7 mm
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Setting to work
(02.0) 4-3 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06351
1.3. Adjustment of tomo layer height indication
Set the service switch (1) on the column controlboard to service. The following message willappear on the control panel display:
Service mode
Diagnosis: 0
Press the <TOMO> key on the control panel (1).This will start the calibration menu. Now follow theinstructions on the display:
Service mode
Move to h=0
Raise the table-top up to laser beam level(corresponding to the minimum objective planelevel 0mm).
Press the <Test> key on the control panel (2). Theposition is now stored in the PLC and the displayshows:
Service mode
Move to h=200
Lower the table-top to 200 mm, use scale meter(corresponding to the maximum objective planelevel 200 mm).Press the <Test> key on the control panel (2). Theposition is now stored in the PLC and the displayshows:
Service mode
Diagnosis: 0
DWARNING
You can always quit the calibration menu without
saving the values by pressing the <TOMO> key
again.
1
Figure 1
T
T
2
1
34
Figure 3
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting to work bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)4--4 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06351
Leave the service switch on the column controlboard in position service to enter the displaylanguage.
1.4. Setting the display language
The service switch should be in mode service.
Service mode
Diagnosis: 0
Press the <Tomo angle> key on the control panel(3). The following message will appear on thecontrol panel display:
Service mode /V _._
Language: english
( V_._ means Softfware--version )
Press the <Tomo time> key (4) to select anotherlaguage. Repeat until the message appears in thedesired language.Press the <Tomo angle> key on the control panel(3) again to quit the menu.Set the service switch on the column control boardback to operation.
T
T
2
1
34
Figure 4
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Setting to work
(02.0) 4-5 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06351
1.5. Adjustment of the tomo axis
Prerequisite: Alignment of standard equipment hasbeen completed.Select tomo on control handle.Move column, table-top and bucky tray to thecenter position (the center position is reached if the4 LED-indicators on the control handle are lit).Move transverse arm to normal position.Insert the coupling bar into central and lowerswivels (1, 2).Fit the coupling bar to the column (3). The lockingbolt (4) will be pushed upwards (which will unlockthe ß-movement axis of the transverse arm).
1. Check that the tomo bar activates the tomo sensorswitch UB S15 when inserted.
2. Adjustment of ball bearing to tomo bar:Ball bearings must be engaged in direct contact tothe tomo coupling bar. So no mechanical clearanceis visible.
Bucky device, light beam localiser and coupling barmust be aligned in a vertical plane.If necessary, align the system by adjusting centralswivel (1), lower swivel (2) and position control bar.
2
3
1
4
B
2
3
1
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting to work bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)4--6 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06351
1.6. Alignment for center line= center of bucky
If the center line 3 is not in center of bucky proceed asfollows.
The tomo coupling bar is y centered vertical (4).Open screws (5) on tomo coupling bar androtate/twist the tube support arm.The center line will still be in center of bucky tray(as shown in pos. 3).
1.7. Checking drive and position control switches
For parameter setting and control please refer to theoperating manual.
Procedure:
Move the column carefully from its center positiontowards the left and right end positions and checkthe following items:- the magnetic switch does not touch the positioncams.
- the micro switches S17/S20 are not damaged orsheared off when passing a cam.
- the magnetic switch is triggered at each angleposition cam and the end position cams. Thiscan be checked by observing the red LED on themagnetic switch B1.
Test the safety limit switches: Move the columnmanually to the left and right limit switch positions.The limit switch must be triggered (I/O-LED 35 ontomo controller (PLC) lits) and the system must beswitched off.Initiate a tomo test cycle on the control panel:Select <Tomo> mode with 40°/4s. Press the<Test> key until the cycle is completed and checkthe following items:- the column moves first to the left (1).- the column moves at constant speed and withoutjerks (otherwise check: cable routing, railalignment, dirt on rail surface, spring pressure,driving axle).
5
UBS17
S20
1
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Setting to work
(02.0) 4-7 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06351
- the eccentric disk operates correctly (otherwisecheck coupling motor (M 3) and position switchUB S16 or both springs are ”fixed too tight”).Therefore, check the distance from screw headto the nut as shown in the figure. The distanceas shown must be 15 ± 0.5 mm.
- the driving wheels grip firmly (otherwise increasespring pressure).
- the column reverses automatically at the endposition on each side.
- the bucky device moves smoothly and withoutjerks (otherwise check alignment of the couplingbar).
- the position control switches (magnetic switchand microswitches) operate correctly, see firststep.
- the position of the coupling bar is vertical aftercompletion of a cycle.
- the distance between control switch B1 and tomoposition cams should be 1 mm.
- If the sequence is aborted, check the function ofthe position control switches (see first step).
- If the sequence is aborted due to timeout (errorcode 30, see subsystem manual buckyDIAGNOST TS, section Fault finding, Chapter”trouble shooting”), increase the motor supplyvoltage by switching to the next highertransformer tap (see schematic diagram Z1-2.1).
Repeat the tomo test cycle with 40 °, 20 ° and 8 °sweeps, with high and low speed settings. Again,check whether any anomalities occur during thetest.
S16
15 ± 0,5 mm
M2
M3
Pivot point
Coupling motor
Tomo motor
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting to work bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)4--8 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06351
2. Tomo adjustment under exposureconditions (tomo only)
2.1. Measurement of X-ray zone
Two exposures are to be taken on the same film.
First exposure = Bucky
Set the parameters for exposure 1 (without tomo):- Small focus- SID = tomo SID- X-ray area = 200 mm x 200 mm- Exposure values = 40 kV / 6.3 mAs
Second exposure = Tomo
Set the parameters for exposure 2 (with tomo):- Small focus- SID = tomo SID- X-ray area = 150 mm x 200 mm- Tomo height = 130 mm- Exposure values = 40 ˚ / 50 kV / 12.5 mA- Tomo time = 2 s
Take the exposure in tomo mode (tomo on) anddetermine the following values:- a = _____mm- b = _____mm
Check if these values meet the following conditions:- ∆ a, b = ≤ 10 mm- Σ a, b = ≤ 80 mm
If the above conditions are not fullfilled, checkwhether the free movement of the α-drive andbucky module is impaired.If under-voltage is indicated on the generatorcontrol board, the motor will supply voltage byswitching to the next higher transformer tap (seeschematic diagram Z1-2.1).
a b1
2
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Setting to work
(02.0) 4-9 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06351
2.2. Symmetry of tomo axis
Position the lead plate - 100 mm above the X-Raycassette.
The X-ray cassette ist positioned on the table-top.
Collimate the X-ray field (1) as far as the ”hole” willbe exposed during the whole tomo sweep.Take an exposure in center position (bucky mode)= 70 kV / 10 mAsTake an exposure in tomo mode. 70 kV 2 sec 5mA 40˚.
The result should look like as shown in the figure:
- c ≈ d, i.e. the generator should switch off shortlybefore the system.
- No undervoltage indication should appear on thegenerator.
Check whether these values meet the followingconditions:- |c|-|d| < 5 mm.
If the result is not symmetrical,proceed as follows:- In case of overvoltage lower the tomo speed byselecting a higher resistance with jumpers onboard SZ2 = fine adjustment, i.e. reduce thesupply voltage of the drive or reduce the voltageat transformer T2 side for slow speed = coarseadj. 17.5 V / 15.5 V / 13.5 V ore available. Forhigh speed progr. 31 V / 33 V or 37 V.
- In case of unsymmetry (c < d) increase the tomospeed by selecting a lower resistance withjumpers on board SZ2., i.e raise the supplyvoltage of the drive
¯1
X-ray cassette
100 mm
∅
Lead plate
Table top
dc
3 4
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting to work bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)4--10 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06351
Programming of symmetry (please fill out the table)- The following programming is selected:
U OnT2
R = OON SZ2
value for c and d in mm:
High speed 37 V O
33 V O
31 V O
................ O
c = .....................mm
d =.......................mm
Low speed 17.5 V O
15.5 V O
13.5 V O
................ O
c = .....................mm
d =.......................mm
Remarks: ⇒ = coarse adj. = fine adj. tested with 40 ° 4 sec and40 ° 2 sec
If necessary, readjust the tomo axis (see Section3.13.4 Adjusting the tomo axis).Repeat the above test.
2.3. Tomography resolution test
Take an exposure with the TOMO test phantomwith following parameter:
TOMO angle TOMO time TOMO height Actual valueResolution lp/mm
40° 4 sec 50 mm
40° 2 sec 50 mm
40° 4 sec 100 mm
40° 2 sec 100 mm
- Minimum resolution = 2.32 lp/mm with smallfocus.
+/-- 5 mm
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Setting to work
(02.0) 4-11 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06351
2.4. Tomo layer height
(Use TOMO test phantom)
Take the following test exposures with inclinedbucky tray.
Tomo angle Tomo time TOMO layer height --default= nominal value
Measured TOMOlayer height= actual value
Deviation(+/-- 3 mm max.) =nom.--actual value
40 ° 4 seconds 45 mm mm mm
40 ° 4 seconds 130 mm mm mm
40 ° 4 seconds 200 mm mm mm
If the deviation is more than +/-- 3mm, pleaserepeate the table calibration procedure as follows:
1) Raise the table height to theeffective (phantom measured)zero-level. In the display you willsee the amount of the deviation.
2) Follow the instruction part 3.13.2Calibration of the level sensor.Note that your table stays on levelzero, do not move the table to zeroas requested in the displayinstruction.
3) Adjust the laser beam.
J
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TStomo versionPower supplyA3
99
-11-
23 O
st.
4512 983 06141 C Philips Medical Systems
(99.0) Z1-2.1
0VDC
5VDC
X49:2
X49:1
X1:2
X1:1
F146.3A slow
H.V. cable
temperature switch
EG H.V. cable
stator cable, screened
+24VDC
GND
15.5VAC
13.5VAC
0VAC0VAC
X8:8
6.3A slow
34VAC
31VAC
26VAC
28VAC
0VAC
230VAC
230VAC
0VAC
4A slow
X16:3
X16:4
X16:1.1
X16:2.1
EZX3
EX1100
X32:4
X32:3
X31:04
X31:07
X22:04
X22:07
X31:01
X31:12
X22:01
X22:12
+24V
30VAC
0VAC
37VAC
17.5VAC
X20:06
X20:08
+24VX20:01
X20:12
6.3A slow
6.3A slow
ENX2100:L1
ENX2100:N
5A slow
5A slow
X11:12
X8:5
X11:01
X8:4
X8:6
X8:7
L1.1 X11:06
X11:08
X8:2
X8:3
L1
N.1N
X16:1
X16:2
1L1
5N
24VAC
0VAC
+24V
31VAC
15.5VAC
X1:3
X1:4
PLC tomo control
H19
F1
Factory adjusted
F6
H17
H18
H20
XA tube assembly
E generator UE control handleUB stand control
table controlSZ
F2
F5
F12
F11
T2
24VDC/5A
T1
mainsfilter
mains230V~
switchingpower supply
G1
LAhand collimator
SN power supply
centerlaser(optional)
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
bucky DIAGNOST TS Setting to work
(02.0) 4-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06361
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
4-1...4-2 (02.0)
Installation of tomo bar parking frame
Contents
1. Installation of tomo bar parking frame 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06361
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting to work bucky DIAGNOST TS
(02.0)4--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06361
1. Installation of tomo bar parking frame
J
Tomo bar
Wall mounting
65 cm ± 2 cm
10 cm ± 2 cm
Floor
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting to work BuckyDiagnost TS
(04.0) 4-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06371
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
4-1...4-2 (04.0)
2Z-10 (03.0) A1/A3 4512 983 06151Annex CCT (03.0) 4512 983 04441
Final installation work
Contents
1. Final work 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Acceptance test 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06371
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TS Setting to work
(04.0)4--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06371
1. Final work
Install all rail covers.
Connect the earth wiring to all covers.
Install all column covers.
Close the X-ray generator cabinet.
Clean all covers with a mild cleaner e.g. soapsuds.
Check the labelling (see drawing 2Z--10).
2. Acceptance test
See national regulations as e.g. Röv / DOD / VA
CCT Test see in annex chapter.
J
11
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
LabellingBuckyDiagnost TSA1
/A3
03-0
9-16
Sch
r.
4512 983 06151 C Philips Medical Systems
(03.0) 2Z-10
according to the release status
PHILIPS
type 9848 600 0007.s/n yy.00.nnnbucky table elevation
PHILIPS
LASER RADIATIONDO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
MAX. OUTPUT < 1 mWEMITTED WAVELENGTH 650 nmFDA CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
C A U T I O NLASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAMCLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT
IEC 825-1: 1993MAX. OUTPUT < 1mW
EMITTED WAVELENGTH 650 nm
LASER RADIATIONDO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
MAX. OUTPUT < 1 mWEMITTED WAVELENGTH 650 nmFDA CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
C A U T I O NLASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAMCLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT
IEC 825-1: 1993MAX. OUTPUT < 1mW
EMITTED WAVELENGTH 650 nm
2 3
4a 4b
6d
6c7
8a 9
10
8b, 9, 20
11
5
4a or 4b
4
9, 7, 6c or d
Remove cassette tray andmove tabletop in the front position before tilting the table
11
10
STREUSTRAHLENRASTERGRILLE ANTIOFFUSANTE
Lp/cm
fo(cm)
ratio
X-RAY GRID
K
B
16; 17 (a, b, c, d or e)
18 19
1
15
14
14
1819
or
12a
12b
12a or b
13a 13b
13a or b
5 Kg
or
2 or 3
115
PHILIPS
type 9848 600 0264.s/n yy.00.nnnTS Family PEI
230V 50/60Hz 5A
PHILIPS
Class I - TYPE BIEC 60601-1
5
PHILIPS
type 4512 201 0094.s/n yy.00.nnntube stand fixed arm
PHILIPS
8b
8a
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany
X-RAY TUBE HOUSING ASSEMBLY SRO 33100 ROT 350type 9874 005 16122 150kVs/n xxxxx-xxxxxx
X-RAY TUBE SRO 33100type 9874 206 70102 0,6 IEC 336s/n xxxxxx 1,2 IEC 336
PERMANENT FILTRATION MANUFACTURED 2,5 AL / 75
X-RAY TUBE HOUSING ASSEMBLY SRO 2550 ROT 350type 9874 004 23122 150kVs/n xxxxx-xxxxxx
X-RAY TUBE SRO 2550type 9874 206 11102 0,6 IEC 336s/n xxxxxx 1,0 IEC 336
PERMANENT FILTRATION MANUFACTURED 2,5 AL / 75
X-RAY TUBE HOUSING ASSEMBLY SRO 0951 ROT 350type 9890 000 63181 150kVs/n xxxxx-xxxxxx
X-RAY TUBE SRO 0951type 9890 000 64191 0,3 IEC 336s/n xxxxxx 1,0 IEC 336
PERMANENT FILTRATION MANUFACTURED 2,5 AL / 75
MANUFACTUREDPERMANENT FILTRATION2,5 AL / 75
X-RAY TUBE HOUSING ASSEMBLY RO 1750 ROT 350type 9890 000 85281 s/n xxxxx-xxxxxx
X-RAY TUBE RO 1750type 9800 000 85271s/n xxxxxx
0,6 IEC 3361,2 IEC 336
150 kV
MANUFACTUREDPERMANENT FILTRATION2,5 AL / 75
X-RAY TUBE HOUSING ASSEMBLY RO 1648 ROT 350type 9890 000 85301 s/n xxxxx-xxxxxx
X-RAY TUBE RO 1648type 9800 000 85291s/n xxxxxx
0,7 IEC 3361,5 IEC 336
150 kV17a
17b
17c
17d
17e
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany
type 4512 201 0103.s/n yy.00.nnnbucky device left
type 4512 131 17424cassette tray left
type 9848 600 0209.s/n yy.00.nnn
This product complies with the DHHSrequirements of 21 CFR Sub-Chapter JManufactured: month yyyy
USC®
0,3 Al / 75
via Schiapparelli 27 / 33200035 Lissone (Mi) Italy
type 9848 600 0017.s/n yy.00.nnnManufactured: month yyyy
USC®
0,3 Al / 75
via Schiapparelli 27 / 33200035 Lissone (Mi) Italy
PHILIPS
type 9848 600 0006.s/n yy.00.nnnbucky table fix
PHILIPS
PHILIPS
type 9848 600 0023.s/n yy.00.nnntube stand
PHILIPS
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany
PHILIPS
type 9848 600 0008.s/n yy.00.nnnTOMO Equipment
PHILIPS
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany
This product complies withthe DHHS requirements of21 CFR Sub-Chapter JManufactured: month yyyy
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany
type 9848 600 0208.s/n yy.00.nnncontrol grip tomo/laser TS
type 9848 600 0207.s/n yy.00.nnncontrol grip laser TS
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/GermanyThis product complies withthe DHHS requirements of21 CFR Sub-Chapter JManufactured: month yyyy
This product complies withthe DHHS requirements of21 CFR Sub-Chapter JManufactured: month yyyy
PHILIPSPHILIPS
USC®
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstr. 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany
24V 350mA
~
0123
0051 0051
16Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany
PHILIPS
Made in GermanyPHILIPS
® LR37323
C US
type 9890 010 8137.s/n yy.00.nnntabletop 2m
PHILIPSPHILIPSPhilips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraß 24D-22335 Hamburg / GermanyThis product complies withthe DHHS requirements of21 CFR Sub-Chapter JManufactured: month yyyy
type 9890 010 0219.s/n yy.00.nnntabletop
PHILIPSPHILIPSPhilips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraß 24D-22335 Hamburg / GermanyThis product complies withthe DHHS requirements of21 CFR Sub-Chapter JManufactured: month yyyy
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Record of measured data BuckyDiagnost TH2
(03.0) 9--1 2001 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--04441
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
9-1...9-12 (03.0)
Collimator Compliance Test
Contents
1. Introduction 9--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Test 1: Aligment of BLD Light Field and X-Ray Field (Radiographic) 9--3. . . . .
3. Test 2: X-Ray Field Center Alignment ( Overtable Tube) 9--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Test 3: X-Ray Field Limitation and PBL Operating Range 9--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Workbook Collimator 9--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--04441
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TH2 Record of measured data
(03.0)9--2 2001 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--04441
1. Introduction
NOTEThis test must be done after assembly and after each collimator or X-ray source exchange, to be in compliance
with IEC 60601--1--3 and 21CFR 1020. This test is mandatory for the USA and Canada. If measurements show
values outside of acceptable tolerances (see Workbook 5), check the mechanical adjustments and repeat
measurements. If the stated tolerances are exceeded, then the system is not in complience with IEC
60601--1--3 and FDA regulations and must not be operated.
Test Equipment / Tools
Cassette (18x 24 cm)Cassette (24 x 30 cm)Cassette (35 x 43 cm)Cassette (35 x 35 cm)Ruler, metric / inchMetal washer10 foot measuring tape4 copper strips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Record of measured data BuckyDiagnost TH2
(03.0) 9--3 2001 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--04441
2. Test 1: Aligment of BLD Light Field and X-Ray Field (Radiographic)
NOTEThis test is to determine that the X-ray field size and location is identical to the BLD light field for large and
small focus!
Setup
1. Place the loaded 10 x 12“ (24 x 30 cm) cassette on the table top and center the overtable tube directly at a SIDof 40“ (100 cm).
2. Place empty 8 x 10” (18 x 24 cm) cassette in the bucky unit to enable exposure.
Test
1. Turn on the BLD light.
2. Define the light field perimeter by placingouter edgesof copper strips at the four light field sides (refer tofigure).
3. Placewasher in onequadrant of the film at theanodeend to identify positioning after development.
4. Select large focus andovertable tubeat control deskand expose at 60 kV, 5 mAs.
5. Develop the film.
6. Measure the distances L1, L2, W1 and W2 betweenoutside edges of copper strips and the edges of theX-ray field as shown.
7. Repeat the test for small focus.
film washer
copper strip image (4 x)
L1
W1 W2
L2
Perimeter of the light field 20x20cmcorresponds to the outer edge of thecopper strip
Edge of the X-ray field
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TH2 Record of measured data
(03.0)9--4 2001 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--04441
Result
Record all measurements and file in the workbook. The measurements must comply with the rejection limits.Number and date the films and file them with the workbook.
SID = 40” (100 cm); 2.0 % x 40” (100 cm) = 0.80” (2 cm)
Large focus L1 + L2 = _____ + _____ = ≤ 2.0 % SID
W1 + W2= _____ + _____ = ≤ 2.0 % SID
Small focus L1 + L2 = _____ + _____ = ≤ 2.0 % SID
W1 + W2= _____ + _____ = ≤ 2.0 % SID
Initials Date
Specification
The total misalignment of the edges of the BLD light field withthe respective edges of the X-ray field along either the widthor length of the light field shall not exceed 2 % of the SID.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Record of measured data BuckyDiagnost TH2
(03.0) 9--5 2001 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--04441
3. Test 2: X-Ray Field Center Alignment ( Overtable Tube)
NOTEThis test must be performed for all tables / bucky stations as well as bucky wallstands, cassette stands etc.!
Setup
Equipment completely assembled.
Test
1. Select the tube and image receptor station on thecontrol desk.
2. Center the tube to the image receptor by using theavailable centering aids (the centering stops on theceiling rails, the centering light in the tube controlhandle bar etc.). Set tube at max. SID: 40” (100 cm)for bucky table, up to 72” (180 cm) for buckywallstand.
3. Tape the metal washer in one quadrant of thecassette at the anode end for film orientation.
4. Place the loaded cassette (10 x 12 “) or (24 x 30 cm)in the bucky tray and ensure that it is properlycentered before the tray is inserted into the buckyunit.
5. Manually set the BLD to a slightly smaller size(approx. 9 x 11”) than the cassette size so that theradiated area will be within the limits of the X-ray film.
6. Make an exposure at 60 kV, 5 mAs.
7. Develop the film.
8. On the developed film, locate two points on each ofthe four sides of the exposed field as it is shown in thefigure below.
9. Draw straight lines through two points on each side.Extend the lines until they intersect. The resultingrectangle will be a close approximation of the X-rayfield.
10.Draw diagonals across this field. The crossing pointof the diagonals is the X-ray field center.Also draw diagonals across the X-ray film. Thecrossing point is the X-ray film center.
11.Measure the distance between both centers.This is the displacement (misalignment) of the X-rayfield in relation to the image receptor.
washer
exposed field
film
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TH2 Record of measured data
(03.0)9--6 2001 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--04441
Results
Record the displacement and file in the workbook. Write the test number and date on the film and file it with theworkbook. The test result must be within the rejection limit.
NOTEThis test must be performed for all tables / bucky stations as well as bucky wallstands, cassette stands etc.! If
a tube can be used at two different SIDs with the same image receptor, test for both SIDs (tracking).
Measured displacement (mm)Maximum displacement for SID = 100 cm = 20 mmMaximum displacement for SID = 180 cm = 36 mm
bucky table bucky wallstand
_____ mm _____ mm
_____ mm _____ mm
Initials DateInitials Date
Specification
The displacement between the X-ray film center and theX-ray field center must be ≤ 2.0 % SID.SID = 100 cm; maximum displacement = 20 mmSID = 180 cm; maximum displacement = 36 mm.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Record of measured data BuckyDiagnost TH2
(03.0) 9--7 2001 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--04441
4. Test 3: X-Ray Field Limitation and PBL Operating Range
NOTEThis test must be performed for all overtable tube / bucky stations as well as bucky wallstands, cassette stands
etc.! Stands that are used at two different SIDs must be tested at both distances.
Setup
Equipment completely assembled.
Test
TABLE BUCKY (Field Limitation Test / IndicatedField Test)
1. Select table bucky auxiliary at the generator controldesk.
2. Set SID to 100 cm. Center the X-ray tube over tablebucky.
3. Rotate the collimator to 45 °.
4. Insert the loaded 18 x 24 cm cassette in the buckytray.
5. Record the indicated field size from collimator dialsbelow.
Length = ________ Width = ________
6. Make an exposure at 60 kV, 5 mAs.
7. Remove the cassette and put it to a radiation safeplace.
8. Repeat steps 4 and 6 using a loaded 35 x 43 cmcassette.
9. Develop both films.
10.Referring to the figure, measure the actual lengthand width of both films (L1 and W1).Measure the length and width of the exposed area ofboth films (L2 and W2).
Results
Record all measurements and file in the workbook. Verify that the results are within the specifications. Write thetest number and date on the film and file it with the workbook.
film
indicates the exposedarea
45 °
W1
L1
W2L2
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TH2 Record of measured data
(03.0)9--8 2001 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--04441
Test
BUCKY WALLSTAND (Field Limitation Test)
1. Select buckywallstandat thegenerator control desk.
2. Center the X-ray tube to the bucky wallstand and setthe SID to 180 cm (72”).
3. Rotate the collimator to 45 °.
4. Insert the loaded 18 x 24 cm cassette in the buckytray.
5. Make an exposure at 60 kV, 5 mAs.
6. Remove the cassette and put it to a radiation safeplace.
7. Repeat steps 4 and 6 using a loaded 35 x 43 cmcassette.
8. Develop both films.
9. Referring to the figure ont the next page, measurethe actual length and width of both films (L1 andW1).Measure the length and width of the exposed area ofboth films (L2 and W2).
Results
Record all measurements and file in theworkbook. Verify that the results are within the specifications.Write the testnumber and date on the film and file it with the workbook.
NOTEThis test must be performed for all overtable tube / bucky stations as well as bucky wallstands, cassette stands
etc.! Stands that are used at two different SIDs must be tested at both distances.
Specifications
1. The total misalignment of the edges of the X-ray fieldwith the respective edges of the selected portion of theimage receptor along the length or width dimensions ofthe X-ray field in the plane of the image receptor shallnot exceed 3 % of the SID.
2. The sum, without regard to the sign, of the above lengthand width misalignments shall not exceed 4 % of the SID.
3. The indicated field size and actual field size must be within2 % of the maximum SID.
4. For BLDs with PBL and manufactured after November 30,1983:Positive Beam Limiting must be operational when:a X-ray beam is within¦ 3 % of vertical and
SID is 90 cm to 130 cm, inclusive..b X-ray beam is within¦ 3 % of horizontal and
SID is 90 cm to 205 cm, inclusive..
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Record of measured data BuckyDiagnost TH2
(03.0) 9--9 2001 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--04441
BUCKY TABLE:
Indicated Field Size(Value read off of the collimator)
18 x 24 cm cassette 35 x 43 cm cassette
Indicated Width
Indicated Length
18 x 24 cm cassette bucky table
Film(Actual Length and Width)
Exposed Difference Specification100 cm SID
L1 = _____________ cm L2 = _____________ cm L1 -- L2 = _________ cm ≤ 3 cm
W1 = _____________ cm W2 = _____________ cm W1 -- W2 = ________ cm ≤ 3 cm
Total difference =(sum of above)
____________ cm≤ 4 cm
Indicated Exposed Difference Specificaton100 cm SID
(L step 5)__________ cm (L2 above)_________ cm (Ind -- Exp)_________ cm ≤ 2 cm
(W step 5)__________ cm (W2 above)_________ cm (Ind -- Exp)_________ cm ≤ 2 cm
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TH2 Record of measured data
(03.0)9--10 2001 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--04441
BUCKY TABLE (continued):
35 x 43 cm cassette bucky table
Film(Actual Length and Width)
Exposed Difference Specification100 cm SID
L1 = _____________ cm L2 = _____________ cm L1 -- L2 = _________ cm ≤ 3 cm
W1 = _____________ cm W2 = _____________ cm W1 -- W2 = ________ cm ≤ 3 cm
Total difference =(sum of above)
____________ cm≤ 4 cm
Indicated Exposed Difference Specificaton100 cm SID
(L step 5)__________ cm (L2 above)_________ cm (Ind -- Exp)_________ cm ≤ 2 cm
(W step 5)__________ cm (W2 above)_________ cm (Ind -- Exp)_________ cm ≤ 2 cm
Initials Date
Verify with a check (X) (not for manual collimator)
X-ray beam direktion within 3 % of vertical
PBL operational from 90...130 cm SID
Initials Date
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Record of measured data BuckyDiagnost TH2
(03.0) 9--11 2001 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--04441
BUCKY WALLSTAND (BWS):
18 x 35 cm cassette bucky wallstand
Film(Actual Length and Width)
Exposed Difference Specification100 cm SID
L1 = _____________ cm L2 = _____________ cm L1 -- L2 = _________ cm ≤ 5.4cm
W1 = _____________ cm W2 = _____________ cm W1 -- W2 = ________ cm ≤ 5.4 cm
Total difference =(sum of above)
____________ cm≤ 7.2 cm
35 x 43 cm cassette bucky wallstand
Film(Actual Length and Width)
Exposed Difference Specification100 cm SID
L1 = _____________ cm L2 = _____________ cm L1 -- L2 = _________ cm ≤ 5.4cm
W1 = _____________ cm W2 = _____________ cm W1 -- W2 = ________ cm ≤ 5.4 cm
Total difference =(sum of above)
____________ cm≤ 7.2 cm
Initials DateInitials Date
Verify with a check (X) (not for manual collimator)
X-ray beam direktion within 3 % of vertical
PBL operational from 90...205 cm SID
Initials DateInitials Date
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
BuckyDiagnost TH2 Record of measured data
(03.0)9--12 2001 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--04441
5. Workbook Collimator
General
Customer:Customers address:Equipment address:Distributor:Installation date:Report date:Name of service engineer:Signature of the service engineer:
Equipment
Component Description Type Number Serial Number
Collimator j GALILEO 9896 010 0061_
j NICOL 9896 010 2200_
j Manual Collimator 9890 010 804_ _
Bucky table
Bucky wallstand
J
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting to work OPTIMUS 30 single phase
(02.0) 4-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06381
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
4-1...4-2 (02.0)
Switch On the System
Contents
1. Switch ON the System 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1 Ready 1 / ready 2 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. Check the following LEDs 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06381
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS 30 single phase Setting to work
(02.0)4--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06381
1. Switch ON the System
1.1. Ready 1 / ready 2
Switch the system ON.
The self test procedure of the control desk will gowhile
Service Mode Self Test = 30 seconds.
Normal Mode = 45 seconds.
NoteControl Desk
Ready condition will be not displayed= no green light for ready 1
After prep = anode is accelerated, the ready 2 willbe displayed
2. Check the following LEDs
LEDs are displaying the ready condition:
PCB LED Colour Function3A1 HT Controller DS1 gn Slows to steady flash 1Hz
3A3 Filiament circuit DS1 / DS2 gn Both LEDs are ON
3A2 Interface circuit DS1 gn Generator Power ON
1A ATP Console DS1 red WatchdogLED = ON, Correct timing
with generatorDS2 red Flash 1Hz while communication
Module6 6NL1Power lamp gn
Power lamp is ONfor supply ONPMA is present
J
HOPTIMUS
RDY2
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting to work OPTIMUS 30 single phase
(02.0) 4-1 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06391
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
4-1...4-2 (02.0)
Tube Adjustment
Contents
1. Tube adjustment 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1 Tube conditioning 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06391
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS 30 single phase Setting to work
(02.0)4--2 2002 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512-983-06391
1. Tube adjustment
DWARNINGRadiation is released during the tube conditioning.
1.1. Tube conditioning
This procedure must be performed for each new installed tube. Specially if the storage time between factory andfield exceed 4 weeks. The interval times between exposures must be adhered to andmonitored with a watch. Thebreak-in of the tube only takes place on large focus.
S RGDV 4 / Free exposure
S Select large focus.
S Release exposures according to the following table.
The exposure run must always bemade at one kV level without any repeated start-up of the tube, i.e. the PREPbutton must always remain pressed during the run.
Number of EXPs kV mAs Pause [s]5 81 125 1
303 102 125 1
302 109 125 1
602 125 125 1
120
In the event of electrical interference the process must be continued after an interval of 5 minutes, starting atthe lower kV level.
J
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting to work OPTIMUS 30 single phase
(04.0) 4-1 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06401
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
4--1...4--2 (04.0)
2Z--10 (04.0) A3 4512 983 06201
Final installation work
Contents
1. APR Programmings 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. AEC and Adjustment 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Acceptance Test 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Final Work and Handing Over 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06401
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS 30 single phase Setting to work
(04.0)4--2 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06401
1. APR Programmings
See manual of APR.
2. AEC and Adjustment
See manual of AEC
See manual of Adjustment
3. Acceptance Test
See manual of National Regulation
4. Final Work and Handing Over
Fit all covers to:
-- PMA 800
-- Generator
-- bucky DIAGNOST TS
-- bucky DIAGNOST VE (if established)
-- control desk
Clean covers.
Check the labeling (see drawing 2Z--10).
Hand over the system to the customer.
File in the documentation at side.
J
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
LabellingOPTIMUS 30 Single phaseA3
04-
01-1
4 Sc
hr.
4512 983 06201 C Philips Medical Systems
(04.0) 2Z-10
X-RAY CONTROLX-RAY GENERATOR
INTERNA labellingon generator cabinet
CERTIFICATION This product complies with thePerformance Standard under the Radiation Controlfor Health and Safety Act of 1968, applicable atdate of manufacture. Manufactured: June 2001
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany
SEDECALMade by
X-RAY CONTROLtype 4512 201 0081.s/n C _ _ _ _ _Family PEI 9890 010 8259.
PHILIPSPHILIPS
X11
X3X1
THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUSTO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
WARNING:
- MEDICAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT -WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRIC SHOCK
FIRE, AND MECHANICAL HAZARDSONLY IN ACCORDANCE
WITH UL 60601-1,CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.601.1
<8D20>
PHILIPS
IEC 60601-2-32:1994Associated equipment
CERTIFICATION This product complies with thePerformance Standard under the Radiation Controlfor Health and Safety Act of 1968, applicable atdate of manufacture. Manufactured: June 2001
USC
DEIFISSACL
R
Class I - TYPE B IEC 60601-1
PHILIPS
X-RAY GENERATORtype 9890 010 81981s/n G _ _ _ _ _Family PEI 9890 010 82591
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstraße 24D-22335 Hamburg/Germany
230V ~ 50/60Hz 140A
Made by
SEDECAL
view fromrear side
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06001
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
4-1 (02.0)
Switch-ON
1. Switch-ON of the generatorSwitch ON the fuses present at the clinic.
Switch ON automatic circuit-breakers ENF1, ENF2 and ENF3.
The yellow LED on EN100 power ON circuit must be illuminated.
J
4512--983--06001
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06101
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
4-1...4-5 (02.0)
Software XRGSCOPE
1. Installation software XRGSCOPE
1.1. PC and generator settings to avoid problems during up/downloading of CUcomplete files
Optimus RAD release 2.x and 3.x CMOS data are up/downloaded in one string without handshake.
Any kind of interruption can cause the loading process to fail.
Problems occur mainly during the download to the PC.
A download file which is not complete cannot be used as a safety backup file.
1.1.1. Preparation of the service PC to guarantee a safe loading process
Start XRGSCOPE always from DOS if possible.
When using any WINDOWS version:
Switch OFF all screensavers.
Do not run other programs.
Do not insert any CD in the drive.
Any kind of power management of the PC hardware (BIOS) as well as the windows power management shouldbe switched OFF.If connected to mains power some of these might be automatically OFF.
1.1.2. Preparation of the generator
Preparation of generators without a CAN interface:
Switch ON the generator.The loading process can be started once relay ENK1 has been energized.
4512--983--06101
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--2 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06101
Preparation of generators which are connected via a CAN interface:
-- BuckyDiagnost TH and TH2
-- DigitalDiagnost
-- Thoravision
Disconnect the following plugs:
System Connector
EZX23
signal bus
EZX42 orEZX42--1system CAN
EZX43 orEZX43--1system CAN
BukyDiagnost TH / TH2 X X
DigitalDiagnost X X X
Thoravision X X X
Switch ON the generator.
NOTEThe download procedure must not be started before relay ENK1 has been energized at least 2 minutes after
the generator has been switched ON.
NOTEIn case of mailing CU complete download files or any other xxx.TDL files use a zipped file format.
These files are ASCII files which might be destroyed while being mailed.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--3 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06101
1.2. Installation procedure
Provide the service PC with the hardware key and switch it ON.The hardware key provides access to special program settings and to menu ”Faultfind”.Standard programming is possible without a hardware key.
Connect the PC to X5 on EZ139 CENTRAL UNIT CU via a serial data cable:(A 5m long data cable can be ordered via 12NC: 4512 130 56931)
Insert the floppy disks containing the self-unpacking exe-files of the firmware in the disk drive of the PC:-- OMA : 4512 116 022xx-- OMB : 4512 116 023xxFor unpacking on the harddisk of the PC about 5MB are needed.
Generate a directory e.g. [C:\OPT_R_35] on the PC by typing <md C:\OPT_R_35> or use WIN commands.
Copy the firmware from both floppy disks to the PC into the same directory C:\OPT_R_35 by typing<copy A:\*.* C:\OPT_R_35> or use WIN commands.
Start unpacking the programs by typing <OMAxxxxx.exe> and <OMBxxxxx.exe> or doubleclick on<*.exe> -files.The programs unpack all files needed for the update of the firmware and the newest service tools.
After unpacking [OMAxxxxx.exe] and [OMBxxxxx.exe] can be deleted on the harddisk by typing<del OMAxxxxx.exe> and <del OMBxxxxx.exe>.
For the current contents [of OMA/OMBxxxxx.exe] read [OMA/OMBxxxxx.txt] on the floppy disks.
For a new installation of the generator firmware see subsystem manual OPTIMUS RAD section 4REPLACEMENT, chapter 4”Exchange of firmware ...”.
Call the installation program by typing <xrgscope> or <xrgscope lcd> for PCs with LCD screen.
1 206
2 *
PC: COM1 Generator: EZ139X5
48
(9-pole, female) (25-pole, female)
* 23 ** 36
7* 5
8
7 *54
* = sufficient for communication RAD / RF
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--4 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06101
Start with a XRGSCOPE-screen CUSTOMER.tdl with data which are actually stored in CUSTOMER.tdl. Type“XRGSCOPE customer”Whenever data screens like ’error log index’ are saved to a xxx.TDL file (function save <F3> appears in thebottom line), ‘customer data’ being saved in the CUSTOMER.tdl file are attached to the saved data screen. Ithelps to separate saved screen files of different sites, customers or rooms in the same hospital.Site data must be stored in CUSTOMER.tdl file, only data of this file are attached to the saved screens. Onecan save site specific customer data in self-made files using <F3>. To recall site data use the load <F4> function.
Procedure:Either theCUSTOMER.tdl screen is open or open the ‘Customer Data’ screen. Push <F4> and select a site datafile. The old data screen comes up. Now save this screen with <F3> typing in CUSTOMER as file name.
-- Customer Name:
-- City / State:
-- Country:
-- Generator Location:
-- Generator Serial Number:
-- Generator 12 NC:
-- Memo1:
-- Memo2:
-- Memo3:
After <ESC> the following menu line appears:
File OPTIMUS Select Unit Options Help
Select ”OPTIMUS”.
The following menu line appears:
Program Adjust Accept Faultfind Quit
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--5 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06101
General information:
-- Button <F1> <help> Call help / cancel help.
-- Button <F2> <transmit> Store screen contents / data set in the generator ==> transmit to generator.
-- Button <F3> <save> Store data screen on disk.For an open data screen the path desired can be selected.
-- Button <F4> <load> Load data set from disk.The desired path can be selected.
-- Button <ESC> Commands one step back. Can be used repeatedly.
-- Fields with ↓ Select the possible range of values by pushing <RETURN>.The data are specified by the generator as fixed values.
-- Fields with [...] Input of data via the keyboard.
Error numbers which appear at the beginning of the programming procedure must be erased from the screenby pushing the <RETURN> key.
Current data files, for instance, for online help, tube types, APR programmingare available in thePHILIPS-Intranet.Use path: http://technet.best.ms.philips.com/ and pull down menu as shown below.
If the installation program is called with <xrgscope ?> the possible starting parameters for the service programare listed.
J
412H01
http://technet.best.ms.philips.com/
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
XRAY GENERATORS . . .. . .. . .
DOWNLOAD
PMS TechNet
PHILIPS Insight Medical Systems
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06111
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
4-1...4-13 (02.0)
Z1--1.2 (97.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05751 2Z--2.5 (a/01.0) A4 4512 983 05641Z1--15.1 (97.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05571 2Z--2.6 (01.0) A4 4512 983 056512Z--2.0 01.0) A4 4512 983 05591 2Z--2.8 (01.0) A4 4512 983 056712Z--2.2 (a/01.0) A4 4512 983 05611 2Z--2.9 (01.0) A4 4512 983 056812Z--2.4 (a/01.0) A4 4512 983 05631 2Z--2.10 (01.0) A4 4512 983 05691
Configuration part 1
Contents
1. Setting-to-work overview 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1. Configuration 4--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.1. Date and time 4--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.2. Mains data 4--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3. Tubes 4--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3.1. Tube data set 4--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3.2. Tube speed selection 4--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3.3. Tube limits 4--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3.4. Capacitance of tube connection 4--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3.5. Tube operating modes 4--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1.3.6. Disable tube 4--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2. Registration devices 4--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.1. Data set A ... B 4--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.2. Interface assignment 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.3. Examples for RGDV programming 4--13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06111
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--2 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06111
1. Setting-to-work overview
NOTEThe programming of a generator must take place in the sequence specified below.
As long as no tube or RGDV has been assigned there is no display at all on the desk except “PHILIPS OPTIMUS”.
1.1. Configuration
1.2. Registration devices
RESET the generator
1.3. Tube adjustment
RESET the generator
1.4. Dose rate control
RESET the generator
1.5. Application limits
RESET the generator
1.6. Human interface
RESET the generator
1.7. Option: Tomo Density Control TDC
1.8. Option: VARIOFOCUS
1.9. Option: Area Dose Calculator
1.10. Acceptance test
1.11. Interlock facility for APR modification
1.12. Backup of all configuration data
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--3 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06111
1.1. Configuration
Switch the generator ON.
1.1.1. Date and time
S Select menu:PROGRAM/ DATE AND TIME
S Enter the respective local data.
1.1.2. Mains data
S Select menu:PROGRAM/ MAINS DATA
S Select the nominal value of the mains voltage U.Range: 380V, 400V, 440V, 480VDefault: 400VIf 460V is present program 480V.If 415V is present program 400V.
S Enter the maximum internal mains resistance Ri.Range: 0 ... 500mΩ
Depending on the internal mains resistance and the mains voltage the generator calculates the maximum possibleoutput.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--4 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06111
1.1.3. Tubes
NOTEGenerators which are connected by a CAN interface have to be prepared as described below.
Preparation for:
-- BuckyDiagnost TH and TH2
-- DigitalDiagnost
-- Thoravision
Disconnect the following plugs:
System Connector
EZX23
signal bus
EZX42 orEZX42--1system CAN
EZX43 orEZX43--1system CAN
BukyDiagnost TH / TH2 X X
DigitalDiagnost X X X
Thoravision X X X
Switch ON the generator.
NOTEThe download procedure must not be started before relay ENK1 has been energized at least 2 minutes after
the generator has been switched ON.
Do not care if the generator is not programmed yet.
1.1.3.1. Tube data set
Select menu:PROGRAM/ TUBES/TUBE 1 ... 3/ TUBE 1 ... 3 DATA SET
Start the displayed file TUBExxx.tdl with <RETURN>.All the permitted combinations of tube type and housing type are listed in a window.
Select the respective combination of tube type and housing type from the list and push <RETURN>.
RESET the generator.Then the data which have been configured up to now are read by the processor when the system is started.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--5 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06111
1.1.3.2. Tube speed selection
Depending on the type of tube loaded the anode speed is automatically programmed.
Modifications, if necessary, may only be performed if a hardkey is used on the PC.
CAUTIONWrong programming can cause tube problems.
Select menu:PROGRAM/ TUBES/TUBE 1 ... 3/ TUBE 1 ... 3 SPEED SELECTION
RPM \ tube type RO SRO
Exposure rotation [RPM] 3000 9000
Fast exposure rotation [RPM] n/a n/a
1.1.3.3. Tube limits
Select menu:PROGRAM/ TUBES/ TUBE LIMITS
Program the maximum working voltage which is indicated on the data label:
Max. tube voltage limitRange: 40 ... 150kVDefault: 150kV
Adaptation of the tube takes place only up to this limit.
NOTEIf older tubes are to be operated on this generator, it is urgently recommended that the max. kV used in
practical operation so far be specified instead of the theoretically possible value.
The max. kV value should be determined during the conditioning procedure as described in chapter 1.3.1
(modul Configuration part 2).
After adaptation of a tube the upper kV limit is displayed for each focus of each tube under:Adapted to [kV]: e.g. 125kV
All the other limit programmings are performed by the generator automatically and do not usually have to beobserved.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--6 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06111
1.1.3.4. Capacitance of tube connection
Select menu:PROGRAM/ TUBES/ CAPACITANCE TUBE CONNECTOR
Range: 2.000 ... 10.000nF
The total capacitance for each tube connected is indicated:
C = ½ (CH.V. generator + CH.V. cable)
= 4.550nF Default for H.V. generator + 20m H.V. cable (155pF/m)
Cc x L Cc = specific cable capacitance in [pF/m]C [nF] = 3 + ---------------- L = single cable length in [m]
2000
Single length [m]Capacitance tube connection [nF]
Single length [m]For 155pF/m cable For 200pF/m cable
14 4.085 4.400
16 4.240 4.600
18 4.395 4.800
20 4.550 5.000
22 4.705 5.200
24 4.860 --
26 5.015 --
28 5.170 --
30 5.325 --
The high-voltage cables type 9806 402 6xx02 currently being supplied have a capacitance of 155pF/m.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--7 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06111
1.1.3.5. Tube operating modes
Select menu:PROGRAM/ TUBES/ TUBE OPERATING MODE
-- Intermediate boost:
Select ... Disable = During preparation the rated filament current is applied (default).
Enable = During preparation a reduced filament current is applied.After the release of exposure boosting takes place for a short time before theexposure is released. Effective with tube currents > 80% of max. value.
-- Rotation prolongation after PREP:
Select ... Disable = The tube is braked as soon as preparation has been cancelled.
Enable = After cancellation of preparation the tube is only braked after 30s. Within thistime preparation can be repeated as often as necessary.Recommended for paediatrics and casualty rooms.The enable mode works with high speed rotor control unit only.
1.1.3.6. Disable tube
For correction of the configuration.
Select menu:PROGRAM/ TUBES/ DISABLE TUBE
When the tube is disabled the above stored data set of the tube is erased. To enable the tube the data set has tobe loaded again.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--8 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06111
1.2. Registration devices
1.2.1. Data set A ... B
Select menu:PROGRAM/ REGISTRATION DEVICES/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ DATA SET A ... B
Program the data set A and B of RGDV 1 ... 8 for all exam. / aux. units desired.
NoteProgrammings written on a grey background and marked by a “*” have to be done butdo not affect the functions of this generatorRAD type. (Theyaremade for generatorsR/Fversion).
Data set A
Room: Room number of the exam. / aux. unit for room decade(radiation warning display and door contact).
Tube: Tube assignment for the exam. / aux. unit.
Release circuit number: Number of the release decade of the release circuit adaptation unitWA (e.g.: 1 for X1 etc., see Z1-1.2).
Enable handswitch at generatordesk: Programming Enable release switch
at generator deskEnable externalrelease switch 1)
NO X
YES X
X X
Syncmaster present: NO = Free cassette (without cassette present interlock)
YES = -- Bucky or tomo synchronous contact 2)-- WA 4:1--2 (20/21)
Exposure switch type: Single step = Exposure request instantly with preparation 1)
Double step = Individual preparation request and exposure request
Bucky format density correction: Density correction in steps of 6%. Range: --8 ... +8Correction during collimation, input at WAX11/12 pin 1-2, side fieldsactive when contact closed (<24x24cm), center field only whenopened.With GALILEO or NICOL collimator via Bucky controller with CAN.
* Cone density correction: no function
Dose measurement input: Measuring chamber respectively at input EZX 21, 22, 31, 32, 41
none = No measuring chamber assigned.For free cassette or tomography without TDC.
1) For this function the WA option is required.Ignore for RGDV with CAN: BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, Thoravision, DigitalDiagnost.
2) All RGDV with CAN: BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, Thoravision, DigitalDiagnost.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--9 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06111
Data set A continued:
Dose measurement sensor type:
Bucky AMPLIMAT: Input viaEZX21/22/31/32/41,measuring field selection on control desk possible.
* Scopo amplimat: no function
Photo sensor / AMPLIMAT input: Photo sensor input via EZX21/22/31/32/41.
Exposure series /Tomo movement: NO = Instant brake after exposure end.
NO = To be programmed for tomo systems via system CAN.BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, DigitalDiagnost,
YES = More than one exposure possible with one PREP.For tomo units released by 1WA/2WA, PREP must be keptactive at the release decade to get the tomo stand back tothe start position.
Release delay (automatic techniques): enable = Must be enabled for all AEC techniques.Automatically disabled if non AEC techniquesselected.
disable = Not to be programmed.Keep release delay always on enable.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--10 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06111
Data set A continued:
Mounted radiographical controller:
none = Must be programmed if any release circuit adaptationunit 1WA, 2WA is assigned to this RGDV.No CAN controlled system is assigned to this RGDV.
Bucky controller 1 / DigitalDiagnost = CAN controlled system-- BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, DigitalDiagnostRGDV1 ... 4 only
Bucky controller 2 = No function yet.
Thoravision = Can controlled system-- ThoravisionRGDV1 only
Release circuit adaptation unit: Assignment of the release unit 1WA, 2WAnone = free cassette or in case of a CAN driven examination unit
Mounted tomo extension: none = no tomo unit installed1WA = (1)WAX21 valid as tomography time input2WA = 2WAX21 valid as tomography time input
* Medium II format kV corr. (dose equiv. steps): Range = 0...8 dose equiv. + kV correction steps* Medium II format density corr. (--6% steps): Range = 0...8 --6% density steps* Medium II format mAs corr. (--6% steps): Range = 0...8 --6% mAs steps* Small II format kV corr. (dose equiv. steps): Range = 0...8 dose equiv. kV reduction steps* Small II format density corr. (--6% steps): Range = 0...8 --6% density steps* Small II format mAs corr. (--6% steps): Range = 0...8 --6% mAs steps
An RGDV must not be assigned to a ”mounted radiographical controller” and a ”release circuit adaptation unit”together.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--11 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06111
Data Set B (underlined items = default)
Used for tomo: NOYES = With YES a definition of the tomography time is expected from
the examination unit, e.g. via WAX21 or from a Buckycontroller with tomo.
* Used for fluoroscopy: NO = OkYES = Fluoro unit
* CT add on: NO = Ok (No function available yet)
Disable time override: NOYES = Disables time override function at desk.
Automatically disabled with ”Used for tomo = YES”.
Tube power factor: 1 ... 100%
kV steps: Single = kV-grading in steps of 1kVDose equivalent = 6% kV steps≙ 25% density steps
mA steps: step width in 25, 12 or 6%
Time steps: exposure time step width in 25, 12 or 6%
Density steps: step width in 25, 12 or 6%
Density correction (6% steps): --8 ... 0 ... +8 correction stepsFor correction see chapter 13.
Underexposure display(non-automatic techniques): YES = Underexposure is also indicated with techniques without
AMPLIMAT.YES = To be programmed for tomo systems via system CAN:
BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, DigitalDiagnost.NO = Must be set for all non-CAN tomo systems.
Tube overload protection: ON = Overload protection active (default): red = no PREP possibleOFF = Exposures are possible irrespective of load status.
Must not be programmed.
desk display tube load
green 100%
green -- yellow 100%
yellow 80%
yellow -- red 64%
red 0%
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--12 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06111
1.2.2. Interface assignment
Select menu:PROGRAM/ REGISTRATION DEVICES/ RGDV INTERFACE ASSIGNMENT/ BUCKY/TOMO 1WA...2WA
NOTEThere must be no programming here if the diagnostic unit is connected via the CAN interface:
BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, Thoravision, DigitalDiagnost.
Assign the format and ready contacts of the decade connector WAX11 or WAX12 to a Bucky or tomographyRGDV. Refer to Z1-15.1.
-- Decade Bucky 1 (X11) See following table.
-- Decade Bucky 2 (X12) Program the functions as for the first Bucky decade.
-- Tomo Time 0.1 ... 6000ms for each trajectory.
One tomography unit can be programmed for each device interface.
Decade Bucky 1 ... 2
Tomo mode switch: disable = Input ”tomo mode” is not activated. Remote changeoverBucky / tomography not possible via the examination unit.
enable = Input ”tomo mode” is activated.Remote changeover Bucky / tomography possible.Bucky and tomo RGDV must be defined.
Bucky RGDV -- switch related: none/ RGDV 1 ... 8
The inputs ”format contacts” and ”Bucky ready” are activated.
When the tomo mode switch is enabled, this RGDV is activated when theremote tomo mode switch is open.
Bucky RGDV: none/RGDV 1 ... 8
The inputs ”format contacts” and ”Bucky ready” can be assigned to anyRGDV button.The inputs ”format contacts” and ”tomo ready” are activated.
Tomo RGDV -- switch related: none/ RGDV 1 ... 8
When the tomo mode switch is enabled, this RGDV is activated when theremote tomo mode switch is closed.
S RESET the generator.
S Fill in the program settings in table “RGDV programming” 2Z--2.0 at the end of this modul.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--13 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06111
1.2.3. Examples for RGDV programming
Example No. System Refer drawing
1 -- BuckyDiagnost TH with Bucky controller-- Diagnost 76: Exposure Scopo / BV-DSI 2Z--2.2
2-- HDH with / without tomo time input-- Bucky wall stand-- Free cassette
2Z--2.4
3
-- BuckyDiagnost TH/TH2, Digital Diagnost with Bucky controller andCAN interface
-- Bucky wall stand-- Free cassette
2Z--2.5
4-- BuckyDiagnost TS-- Bucky wall stand-- Free cassette
2Z--2.6
5-- Bucky TH any version with Bucky controller-- Generator equipped with or without decade adaptation unit WA-- Auxiliary for MCS (only) = RGDV4 in combination with free cassette
2Z--2.8
6-- Bucky TH any version-- Generator equipped with or without decade adaptation unit WA-- Auxiliary for MCS (only) = RGDV5 ... 8
2Z--2.9
7
-- Bucky TH any version-- Generator equipped with or without decade adaptation unit WA-- Auxiliary for Trauma Diagnost (only) = RGDV5 ... 8-- Auxiliaries RGDV1 ... 4 must not be used with a Bucky TH system viaCAN
2Z--2.10
J
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
X51
X4
Rel
ease
4
X2
Bucky/Tomo interface 2
Rel
ease
3
X1
Rel
ease
2
Rel
ease
1
X24X23
PTC
X22X21
Exte
rnal
APR
T
EXO
N
Tom
o tim
es
Tom
o tra
ject
orie
s
X4X3X2
Rel
ease
4
Bucky/Tomo interface 1
X52
PTC
X24X23X22X21
102Universal
I/O interface
Buck
y 2
X11
EXO
N
X12 X13
Tom
o tim
es
X14
Tom
o tra
ject
orie
s
Exte
rnal
APR
T
Buck
y 2
X11 X3
Buck
y 1
Option rack
CAN/XS-Bus
102Universal
I/O interface
or
WA
X52
for 4 aux. unitsAdaptor decade cable
CAN/XS-Bus
2 WA
W
Function unit ADAP bFunction unit ADAP a
X14X13
Buck
y 1
X12
Rel
ease
3
Rel
ease
2
Rel
ease
1
X1
EZX19
CAN/XS-Bus
Block diagramExpansions
Z1-1.2
Schr
./Kö
02-0
3-19
A1/A
3
4512 983 05751c Philips Medical Systems
(97.0)
Termination resistor
EZX45CAN/XS-BusX51 X52
EZX45or1WA X52
15 pin
2WA X52whoever is thelast in line
X42
Adaptor decade cable
26VDCX41
for 4 aux. units
X4226VDCEZX19
X41X42
1 WA for 4 aux. unitsAdaptor decade cable
102Universal
I/O interface
Function unit ADAP _a
Tom
o tim
es
X21
EXO
N
X14
Tom
o tra
ject
orie
s
X22X13
Exte
rnal
APR
T
X23
Bucky/Tomo interface 1
Buck
y 2
X12
PTC
X24
Buck
y 1
X11
Rel
ease
4
X4R
elea
se 3
X3
Rel
ease
2
X2
Rel
ease
1
X1
X51
EZX45
26VDCX41
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
X1:C
27SL
TO
TM
8
X1:A
27SL
TO
TM
7
X1:C
26SL
TO
TM
6
X1:A
26
X1:C
25
SL T
O T
M 5
X1:A
25
SL T
O T
M 4
10tra
ject
orie
s
WA / 1WA / 2WAAdapter 4 auxil. units
Z1-15.1
X2:A
9
X2:C
9
CO
M E
X C
D
X1:A
24
X1:C
24
EX C
D
IT 0
V
SL T
O T
M 1
SL T
O T
M 2
SL T
O T
M 3
K18
10R
EX O
N
X1:C
19
X1:A
12
X1:C
12
SW B
U 1
SW B
U 2
4 5 8
10
9
8 9
X1:A
21
X14
1 2 3
X13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X AC
T/
EX C
D
t
500.
..600
ms
RQ
PQ
/
EXO
N
t
X1:A
10
4
3
4
X1:A
4
4
X1:C
6
3 4
X1:C
8
PO 2
6V R
E
X1:C
10
X1:A
C1
6 7 10
X1:C
205 6 7 82 3 4
codi
ng
gene
rato
r CAN
hig
h ac
tive
gene
rato
r CAN
low
act
ive
Expa
nsio
ns
GN
D S
or P
O 0
V
NR
PR
X/
PO 2
6V
expo
sure
end
grou
nd
com
mon
for e
xpos
ure
end
expo
sure
on
PO 2
6V R
E
RES
ET C
/
sign
al b
us e
nabl
e X-
ray
RQ
PR
/R
G D
V 1.
..4
sign
al b
us X
-ray
requ
est c
omm
and
RQ
PR
HS
sign
al b
us g
roun
d
+26V
sup
ply
emitt
er 0
V ex
posu
re o
n si
gnal
+26V
sup
ply
reve
rse
not r
eady
pre
parin
g fo
r X-ra
y
regi
stra
tion
devi
cesy
stem
RES
ET c
omm
and
requ
est p
repa
ratio
n
SW T
O 1
SW S
F C
F 2
SW T
O 2
TOM
O P
GTO
PG
1...
8TO
PG
SL
(SW
pro
gram
mab
le in
Dat
a Se
t A)
requ
est p
repa
ratio
n fro
m h
ands
witc
h
X AC
T/
V15
S or
PO
V
requ
est X
-ray
gene
rato
r for
exp
osur
e
switc
h bu
cky
2
XG R
D E
X 1.
..4
requ
est X
-ray
gene
rato
r for
fluo
rosc
opy
switc
h to
mog
raph
y 1
tom
o pr
ogra
m
switc
h to
mog
raph
y 2
sele
ct X
-ray
gene
rato
r for
tom
ogra
phy
tom
o m
ode
prog
ram
med
tom
o pr
ogra
m s
elec
ted
sign
al b
us +
15V
supp
ly
sign
al b
us X
-ray
activ
e
switc
h si
de fi
eld
to c
entra
l fie
ld b
ucky
mea
surin
g ch
ambe
r 1sw
itch
side
fiel
d to
cen
tral f
ield
buc
ky m
easu
ring
cham
ber 2
X-ra
y ge
nera
tor r
eady
for e
xpos
ure
requ
est
10
X1:A
13
X2:A
25R
Q S
N X
/
K13
PO 2
6V
RQ
XG
PR
1
RQ
XG
PR
2
RQ
XG
PR
3
RQ
XG
PR
4
X41:
1 PO 2
6V
CTR
L X/
RD
PR
X
X2:C
25
EN X
/N
R P
R X
/X2
:C26
W1
Selft
est
Star
t
Rea
dy
Erro
r
CAN
- an
noun
cem
ent
+m
ax.:
26V
1
10m
A
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Tom
o
X22
Tom
o tim
es
35
Form
at
6 7
(97.0)
8 9 10
X1:C
31
ADAP
_ b
ADAP
_ a
ADAP
_ a
===
2WA
1WA
WA
Func
tion
unit
Philips Medical Systems
Rel
ease
con
trol
(gal
vani
c de
coup
led)
1
2X23
4 5 6 7 8 9
SLPG
1
SLPG
2
SLPG
3
SLPG
4
SLPG
5
SLPG
6
6 7
Schr
./Kö
A1/A
3
Rel
ease
1(5
)
X2R
elea
se 2
(6)
c
Rel
ease
3(7
)
X3
)
Rel
ease
4(8
)
from
451
2 10
8 08
043
onw
ards
:- K
1 in
XG
RD
EX c
ircui
t
- sig
nal E
X C
D a
dded
K1V9
max
. 26V
,5A
1 3 10
+
+26V
GN
D2
RQ
PR
HS
RQ
XG
PR
02-0
3-19
X1 1
- V9
: max
. I in
crea
sed
from
1A
to 5
A
X1:A
3
+5V
8 9
K1
K14
K15
X1:C
4
Rel
ease
1...
4
K16
X1:A
7
RG
DV
1
K17
X1:A
9
X1:A
11
X1:A
5
5
8 9
X2:A
C14
V15
SPO
V
DC
GN
D S
X2:A
C15
PO 0
V
DC
CAN
H
CAN
L
RES
ET C
/
X2:A
C27
CO
D 1
CO
D 2
CO
D 3
+15V
X2:C
3
X2:A
3
X2:A
6
X2:A
21
X2:C
21
X2:A
22
Buck
y 2(
4)
X12
open
ed:
X11
1
2 3 4
SW S
F C
F 1
SW S
F C
F 2
Test
PR
EP
S2
Test
FLU
OR
O
S1
X1:A
30
X1:C
30
X21
TO P
G 1
TO P
G 2
TO P
G 3
TO P
G 4
TO P
G 5
TO P
G 6
TO P
G 7
X1:C
13
X1:A
14
X1:C
14
X1:A
15
X1:C
15
X1:A
16
SL P
G 7
X1:C
16
X1:A
17
X1:C
17
X41:
2
X52
W2
W1
W2
W3
requ
est s
ynch
roni
zatio
nR
Q S
N X
/R
Q X
G E
XR
Q X
G F
LR
Q X
G P
R1.
..4
inte
rface
K5 K4 K7 K6
PO 2
6VX AC
T/ W12
W13
GN
D 2
X42:
2
7
RG
DVS
L(n)
RG
DVS
L(m
)
WA
or 1
WA
2WA
I/O
Bidi
rect
iona
l
inte
rface
stat
us
X1:A
28
X1:C
28
X1:A
31
H1
K9
X1:A
18
X1:A
20
X1:C
18
X1:A
19
SL X
G T
O
SW T
O 1
SW T
O 2
9
EXO
N
1010
CM
EX
SW 1
clos
ed:
CM
EX
SW 2
CM
EX
SW 3
CM
EX
SW 4
X1:C
11
TO P
G 1
...8
K12
TO P
G S
L
RG
DV
2
RG
DV
35
RG
DV
45
RQ
XG
FL
6
GN
D 2
6 7
6 7 9
8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5PTC
X24
SL P
G 1
TOM
O P
G
SL P
G 2
SL P
G 3
TO P
G S
L
SL P
G 4
SL P
G 5
SL P
G 6
PO 2
6V
PO 2
6V
SL C
O 1
SL C
O 2
WA
1WA X5
1X4 1
1R
Q X
G E
X1
TO P
G 8
Exte
rnal
APR
T
K3
C75
I/O brai
n
X2:A
C28
2
Tom
o
X1:A
C2
X1:C
5
X1:C
7
X1:C
9
K14.
..K17
K4...
K11
K1R
Q P
R/
RQ
XG
FL
+26V
2 4 5 6 7 8 9
K2
GN
D2
W3
K8 K11
K10
K12
CAN
/XS
bus
PO 2
6V R
E
X42:
1
5
for
for
EZX4
5/
orEZ
X19
EZX4
5or
/W
NX2
1
1WA
X42
/ 1
WA
X52
for
2W
A
X2:A
24
X2:C
24
RQ
PR
/
sele
ct c
orre
ctio
n 1
(thic
knes
s)se
lect
cor
rect
ion
2 (th
ickn
ess)
sele
ct e
xt A
PRT
prog
ram
sele
ct to
mo
time
switc
h bu
cky
1
requ
est X
-ray
gene
rato
r for
pre
para
tion
com
mon
for e
xpos
ure
switc
h of
regi
stra
tion
devi
ce
SL C
O 1
SL C
O 2
SL P
G 1
...8
SL T
O T
M 1
...8
SL X
G T
OSW
BU
1SW
BU
2SW
SF
CF
1
K14
X1:C
3XG
RD
EX
1
K15
X1:A
6XG
RD
EX
2
6 7 8 9 10
SL P
G 8
Tom
o m
ode
X1:A
32
2
2XG
RD
EX
3X1
:A8
K16
K17
Tom
o re
ady
Buck
y re
ady
X1:C
32
102
EXO
N
Uni
vers
al
Inte
rface
Log
ic
I/O in
terfa
ce
I/O
Bidi
rect
iona
l
K14
K15
K16
K17
X1:A
29
X1:C
29
CAN
HC
AN L
CO
D1.
..3
Mne
mon
ics
EN X
/
CTR
L X/
EX C
D
CO
M E
X C
D
EX O
N
W11
CM
EX
SW 1
...4
GN
D 2
IT 0
V
3
2
max
. I
= 1A
XG R
D E
X 4
3 8 10
Buck
y 1(
3)
1
cont
act
4512 983 05571
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
2Z--2.0
RGDV programming
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05591_010
E1997 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(01.0)4512 983 05591
-Nam
e:
- DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV5
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
--Tube
:--Release
circuitnum
ber:
--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:--Syncm
asterpresent:
--Exposuresw
itchtype
:--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
--Conedensity
correction:
--Dosemeasurementinput:
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
--Exposureseries/Tomomovem
ent(Nobreakafterexposureend):
--Release
delay:
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
--Mounted
tomoextension:
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
--Usedforfluoroscopy
:--CTaddon
:--Disabletim
eoverride:
--Tube
powerfactor:
--kV
steps:
--mAssteps:
--mAsteps:
--tim
esteps:
--Densitysteps:
--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
--Underexposuredisplay:
--Tube
overload
protection:
Bucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomo1W
A\Tomotime[s]:
Tomomodesw
itch
Tomotim
e1:
Tomotim
e5:
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
Tomotim
e2:
Tomotim
e6:
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
Tomotim
e3:
Tomotim
e7:
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
Tomotim
e4:
Tomotim
e8:
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
(a/01.0) 2Z--2.2
RGDV programming: example 2
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05611_2Z--2_2_a010
E1997 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512 983 05611
-BuckyDiagnostTHwithBucky-C
ontroller
Nam
e:
-D76
:Exposure
Scopo/B
V-D
SI
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
D76
Scopo
D76
BV--DSI
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV5
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
11
--Tube
:1
11
12
2--Release
circuitnum
ber:
donotcare
donotcare
donotcare
donotcare
12
--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
nono
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
00
--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
00
--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
EZX22
EZX41
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
(Bucky
amplimat)
Scopo
amplimat
photosensor/
amplimatinput
--Exposureseries/Tomomovem
ent:
nono
nono
yes
yes
--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
none
none
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
none
none
none
none
1WB
1WB
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
none
none
none
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
001)
--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
001)
--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
001)
--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
001)
--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
001)
--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
001)
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
noyes
nono
nono
--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
noyes
yes
--CTaddon
:no
nono
nono
no--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
nono
--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.
1)Doseequiv.
1)Doseequiv.
1)Doseequiv.
1)Doseequiv.
1)Doseequiv.
1)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%12
%1)
12%
--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
00
--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
onon
Bucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomo1W
A\Tomotime[s]:
Tomomodesw
itch
--------
--------
Tomotim
e1:
--------
Tomotim
e5:
--------
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Tomotim
e2:
--------
Tomotim
e6:
--------
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[x]RGDV6[x]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e3:
--------
Tomotim
e7:
--------
ucy
GRGDV5[x]RGDV6[x]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e4:
--------
Tomotim
e8:
--------
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05631_2Z--2_4_a010
E1997 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
2Z--2.4
RGDV programming: example 4
(a/01.0)4512 983 05631
HDH:without/[with
tomotim
einput]
Nam
e:
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
Freecassette
USA
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV4
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
1--Tube
:1
11
11
--Release
circuitnum
ber:
11
3(4)
4--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
noyes
--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
0--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
0--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
none
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
(Bucky
amplimat)
(Bucky
amplimat)
--Exposureseries/Tom
omovem
ent:
noyes
nono
no--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
none
none
none
none
none
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
1WA
1WA
1WA
none
1WA
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
none
(1WA)
none
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
nono
(yes)
nono
no--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
nono
--CTaddon
:no
nono
nono
--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
no--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%12
%--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
noyes
yes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
onBucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomo1W
A\Tomotime[s]:
Tomomodesw
itch
dis(en)able
disable
Tomotim
e1:
0,8
Tomotim
e5:
0,1
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
RGDV1
none
Tomotim
e2:
3,2
Tomotim
e6:
0,1
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
RGDV3
none
Tomotim
e3:
0,8
Tomotim
e7:
0,1
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
none
none
Tomotim
e4:
3,2
Tomotim
e8:
0,1
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
RGDV2
none
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05641_2Z--2_5_a010
E1997 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
2Z--2.5
RGDV programming: example 5
(a/01.0)4512 983 05641
BuckyD
IAGNOSTwithBucky-C
ontroller
Nam
e:
TH/TH2/D
igitalDiagnost
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV5
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
--Tube
:1
11
1--Release
circuitnum
ber:
donotcare
donotcare
donotcare
donotcare
--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
(Bucky
amplimat)
--Exposureseries/Tom
omovem
ent:
nono
nono
--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
none
none
none
none
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
none
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
noyes
nono
--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
no--CTaddon
:no
nono
no--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
Bucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomotime
Tomomodesw
itch
--------
--------
Tomotim
e1:
--------
Tomotim
e5:
--------
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Tomotim
e2:
--------
Tomotim
e6:
--------
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e3:
--------
Tomotim
e7:
--------
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e4:
--------
Tomotim
e8:
--------
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05651_2Z--2_6_010
E2001 PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
2Z--2.6
RGDV programming: example 6
(01.0)4512 983 05651
BuckyD
IAGNOSTTS
Nam
e:
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV5
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
--Tube
:1
11
1--Release
circuitnum
ber:
11
2(1)
--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
no--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
--Exposureseries/Tom
omovem
ent:
noyes
nono
--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
none
none
none
none
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
1WA
1WA
1WA
none
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
1WA
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
noyes
nono
--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
no--CTaddon
:no
nono
no--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseeqiv.1
)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
noyes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
Bucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomotime
Tomomodesw
itch
enable
--------
Tomotim
e1:
--------
Tomotim
e5:
--------
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
RGDV1
--------
Tomotim
e2:
--------
Tomotim
e6:
--------
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
none
--------
Tomotim
e3:
--------
Tomotim
e7:
--------
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
none
--------
Tomotim
e4:
--------
Tomotim
e8:
--------
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
RGDV2
--------
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05671_2Z--2_8_010
E2001 PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
2Z--2.8
RGDV programming: example 8
(01.0)4512 983 05671
BuckyD
IAGNOSTTHanyversionwithBucky-C
ontroller
Nam
e:
Generotorequipped
with/w
ithoutdecadeadapt.unitWA
Aux.forMCS(only)=RGDV4combined
withfree
cassette
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
MCS
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV4
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
1--Tube
:1
11
11
--Release
circuitnum
ber:
11
11
1--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
0--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
0--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
EZX22
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
(Bucky
amplimat)
Bucky
amplimat
--Exposureseries/Tom
omovem
ent:
nono
nono
no--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
none
none
none
none
none
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
none
none
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
noyes
nono
no--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
nono
--CTaddon
:no
nono
nono
--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
no--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%12
%1)
--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
onBucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomotime
Tomomodesw
itch
--------
--------
Tomotim
e1:
--------
Tomotim
e5:
--------
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Tomotim
e2:
--------
Tomotim
e6:
--------
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e3:
--------
Tomotim
e7:
--------
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e4:
--------
Tomotim
e8:
--------
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05681_2Z--2_9_010
E2001 PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
2Z--2.9
RGDV programming: example 9
(01.0)4512 983 05681
BuckyD
IAGNOSTTHanyversion
Nam
e:
Generotorequipped
with/w
ithoutdecadeadapt.unitWA
Aux.forMCS(only)=anyofRGDV5...8
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
MCS
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV5
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
1--Tube
:1
11
11
--Release
circuitnum
ber:
11
11
1--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
yes
no--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
0--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
0--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
EZX22
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
(Bucky
amplimat)
Bucky
amplimat
--Exposureseries/Tom
omovem
ent:
nono
nono
no--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
none
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
none
none
none
none
none
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
none
none
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
noyes
nono
no--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
nono
--CTaddon
:no
nono
nono
--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
no--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%12
%1)
--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
onBucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomotime
Tomomodesw
itch
--------
--------
Tomotim
e1:
--------
Tomotim
e5:
--------
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Tomotim
e2:
--------
Tomotim
e6:
--------
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e3:
--------
Tomotim
e7:
--------
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e4:
--------
Tomotim
e8:
--------
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05691_2Z--2_10_010
E2001 PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
2Z--2.10
RGDV programming: example 10
(01.0)4512 983 05691
BuckyD
IAGNOSTTHanyversion
Nam
e:
Generotorequipped
with/w
ithoutdecadeadapt.unitWA
Aux.forTraumaD
iagnost(only)=anyofRGDV5...8
Aux.RGDV1...4mustnotbeusedwithaBuckyTHstystemviaCAN
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
Trauma
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV5
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
1--Tube
:1
11
12
--Release
circuitnum
ber:
11
11
1--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
yes
no--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
0--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
0--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
EZX22
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
(Bucky
amplimat)
Scopo
amplimat
--Exposureseries/Tom
omovem
ent:
nono
nono
no--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
none
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
none
none
none
none
none
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
none
none
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
noyes
nono
no--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
noyes
--CTaddon
:no
nono
nono
--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
no--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%12
%1)
--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
onBucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomotime
Tomomodesw
itch
--------
--------
Tomotim
e1:
--------
Tomotim
e5:
--------
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Tomotim
e2:
--------
Tomotim
e6:
--------
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e3:
--------
Tomotim
e7:
--------
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e4:
--------
Tomotim
e8:
--------
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
4-1...4-38 (02.0)
Z1--15.1 (97.0) A1/A3 4512 983 05571 2Z--2.8 (01.0) A4 4512 983 05671Z2--15.1 (97.0) A3/A3 4512 983 05741 2Z--2.9 (01.0) A4 4512 983 056812Z--2.0 01.0) A4 4512 983 05591 2Z--2.10 (01.0) A4 4512 983 056912Z--2.2 (a/01.0) A4 4512 983 05611 2Z--3 (97.0) A3 4512 983 057212Z--2.4 (a/01.0) A4 4512 983 05631 2Z--4 (97.0) A4 4512 983 057712Z--2.5 (a/01.0) A4 4512 983 05641 2Z--5 (97.0) A4 4512 983 057312Z--2.6 (01.0) A4 4512 983 05651
Configuration part 2
Contents1.3. Tube adjustment 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.1. Tube conditioning 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.1.1. Preconditions / Programmings 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.1.2. Procedure 4--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.2. Tube adaptation 4--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.2.1. General information 4--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.2.2. Preconditions / Programmings 4--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.2.3. Procedure 4--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.3. Final tube adjustment work 4--10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.4. Problems during adaptation - Symptoms and solutions 4--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4. Dose rate control 4--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.1. AMPLIMAT sensitivity 4--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2. Screen/film combinations 4--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2.1. Automatic DRC processing 4--13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2.2. Manual DRC processing 4--14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2.3. Density correction for AEC technique (option) 4--15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.3. Fault exposure detection 4--16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5. Application limits 4--17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5.1. X-mode limits 4--17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5.2. Thoravison limits 4--18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6. Human interface 4--19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.1. Additional program settings for generators without option APR 4--20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.2. Language 4--21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.3. Automatic programming of APRs (option) 4--21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.4. Manual programming of APRs (option) 4--24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.4.1. Creating menus 4--25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.4.2. Creating sub menus 4--25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.4.3. Assigning APRs 4--26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.5. Changing of APR radiation parameters 4--27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.5.1. Density correction for non-AEC techniques 4--30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.5.2. AEC fixed current (kV-mA) 4--30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.6. Moving / copying of an APR data set 4--31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.7. Deleting of APRs 4--32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.8. Manipulating menus 4--33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.9. External APR assignment 4--34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7. Option: Tomo Density Control TDC 4--36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8. Option: VARIOFOCUS 4--37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.9. Option: Area Dose Calculator 4--37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10. Acceptance test 4--37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.11. Interlock facility for APR modification 4--38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.12. Backup of all configuration data 4--38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4512--983--06121
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--2 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.3. Tube adjustment
1.3.1. Tube conditioning
DWARNING
Radiation is released during the conditioning procedure!
1.3.1.1. Preconditions / Programmings
Switch OFF the generator.
Preparation of generators which are connected via a CAN interface:
-- BuckyDiagnost TH and TH2
-- DigitalDiagnost
-- Thoravision
Disconnect the following plugs:
System Connector
EZX23
signal bus
EZX42 orEZX42--1system CAN
EZX43 orEZX43--1system CAN
BukyDiagnost TH / TH2 X X
DigitalDiagnost X X X
Thoravision X X X
Switch ON the generator.
NOTEThe programming procedure must not be started before relay ENK1 has been energized at least 2 minutes
after the generator has been switched ON.
Perform the following programmings temporarily for each tube connected to one of the assignedRGDV = Free cassetteSelect menu XRGSCOPE:PROGRAM/ REGISTRATION DEVICES/ RGDV#/ DATA SET A
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--3 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
Programming Temporarily Original Tube
Enable handswitch ...... YES
Syncmaster present NO
Exposure switch type Double Step Verify the customizedentries in 2Z--2.x
Exposure series / Tomo ...... YESentries in 2Z--2.x
Mounted radiographic ...... NONE
RESET the generator.
Select appropriate programmed RGDV = “Free cassette” for the tube to be conditioned.
1.3.1.2. Procedure
Select large focus only.
NOTEThe generator must be in the READY state.
Run reconditioning procedure for an adapted tube, refer to following table, left column TUBE ADAPTED.
or
Run conditioning procedure for a new or non-adapted tube, refer to following table right column TUBE NOTADAPTED.
It is recommended that the high tension be monitored during conditioning.Connect the scope:
Channel1: kV AV HT at EZ130 X3 (1V/div), scale: 20kV/VTrigger external: CTRL_X_C/ at backpanel EZ X74, negative slopeTime base: 2ms/div
In case of problems like tube arcing see the following flowchart EXPOSURE SEQUENCE as an example.The flowchart applies for applicable kV range only, e. g.:109kV is the max. kV value for normal application, perform just up to next higher kV step = 117kV.
NOTERefer to flowchart EXPOSURE SEQUENCE.
If the tube arcs at a certain kV value, switch another 3 exposures with same parameters and 10s pause
between subsequent exposures. In case of success (no arcing anymore) continue with next kV step of the
following table.
If the last exposure still arcs go one kV step back and follow normal procedure. If this routine has been
performed three times without improvement: ==> Replace the tube!
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--4 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
Exposure parameters for conditioningTube adapted # exposures Tube not adapted
kV mA ms kV mAs80 10 50 < 1 > 80 0.5
80 10 500 < 1 > 80 5
80 200 250 < 1 > 80 50
10 seconds pause 10 seconds pause
80 max. mA 100 < 1 > 80 100
1 minute pause 1 minute pause
90 10 50 < 1 > 90 0.5
90 10 500 < 1 > 90 5
90 200 250 < 1 > 90 50
10 seconds pause 10 seconds pause
90 max. mA 100 < 1 > 90 100
1 minute pause 1 minute pause
100 10 50 < 1 > 100 0.5
100 10 500 < 1 > 100 5
100 200 250 < 1 > 100 50
10 seconds pause 10 seconds pause
100 max. mA 100 < 1 > 100 100
1 minute pause 1 minute pause
110 10 50 < 1 > 110 0.5
110 10 500 < 1 > 110 5
110 200 250 < 1 > 110 50
10 seconds pause 10 seconds pause
110 max. mA 100 < 1 > 110 100
1 minute pause 1 minute pause
120 10 50 < 1 > 120 0.5
120 10 500 < 1 > 120 5
120 200 250 < 1 > 120 50
10 seconds pause 10 seconds pause
120 max. mA 100 < 1 > 120 100
1 minute pause 1 minute pause
130 10 50 < 1 > 130 0.5
130 10 500 < 1 > 130 5
130 200 250 < 1 > 130 50
10 seconds pause 10 seconds pause
130 max. mA 100 < 1 > 130 100
1 minute pause 1 minute pause
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--5 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
Exposure parameters for conditioningTube adapted # exposures Tube not adapted
kV mA ms kV mAs140 10 50 < 1 > 140 0.5
140 10 500 < 1 > 140 5
140 200 250 < 1 > 140 50
10 seconds pause 10 seconds pause
140 max. mA 100 < 1 > 140 100
1 minute pause 1 minute pause
145 10 50 < 1 > 145 0.5
145 10 500 < 1 > 145 5
145 200 250 < 1 > 145 50
10 seconds pause 10 seconds pause
145 max. mA 100 < 1 > 145 100
1 minute pause 1 minute pause
148 10 50 < 1 > 148 0.5
148 10 500 < 1 > 148 5
148 200 250 < 1 > 148 50
10 seconds pause 10 seconds pause
148 max. mA 100 < 1 > 148 100
1 minute pause 1 minute pause
150 10 50 < 1 > 150 0.5
150 10 500 < 1 > 150 5
150 200 250 < 1 > 150 50
10 seconds pause 10 seconds pause
150 max. mA 100 < 1 > 150 100
1 minute pause 1 minute pause
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--6 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
NOTEIf a tube arcs at any kV value which is not required for application the max. kV (e.g.117kV) program this new
limit value by XRGSCOPE:
PROGRAM/ TUBES/ TUBE LIMITS/ MAX. TUBE VOLTAGE LIMIT [kV]/ [117]
As the limit value decreases for this reason, a following re-adaptation procedure sets the fieldADAPTED TO [kV] to this value as well.
Set RGDV programming to original status if no adaptation procedure has to be executed.
RESET the generator.
394H00
Exposure sequencekV step 180kV
kV step n
kV step n+1
kV step n+2
still arcing?yesno
max.3
loops
= kV limitEND
3 exposureswith sameparameters.Wait 10safter eachexposure!
exposurewith arcing
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--7 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.3.2. Tube adaptation
DWARNING
Radiation is released during the adaptation procedure!
1.3.2.1. General information
Tube adaptation is an automatic process which includes:
1. The measurement of the mA offset value that is caused by:
-- the kV measuring circuit
-- the emission current feedback circuit (VCO)
2. The measurement of the individual standby filament current (based on 100µA).
3. The emission current characteristic as f (kV, filament current).
4. The dynamic behavior (positive and negative boost adaptation) where the inertia of the filament with respectto heating up and cooling down is registered.For more information refer to subsystem manual OPTIMUS RAd section 3: FAULT FINDING.
NOTEIn case of problems check the symptom / solution list at the end of this adjustment chapter. Repeat the
adaptation for this particular focus.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--8 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.3.2.2. Preconditions / Programmings
Switch OFF the generator.
Preparation of generators which are connected via a CAN interface:
-- BuckyDiagnost TH and TH2
-- DigitalDiagnost
-- Thoravision
Disconnect the following plugs:
System Connector
EZX23
signal bus
EZX42 orEZX42--1system CAN
EZX43 orEZX43--1system CAN
BukyDiagnost TH / TH2 X X
DigitalDiagnost X X X
Thoravision X X X
Switch ON the generator.
NOTEThe adaption procedure must not be started before relay ENK1 has been energized at least 2 minutes after the
generator has been switched ON.
The tube must be conditioned as described in chapter 1.3.1 “Tube conditioning”.
Check the upper kV limitSelect menu XRGSCOPE:PROGRAM/ TUBES/ TUBE LIMITS/ MAX. TUBE VOLTAGE LIMIT [kV]
The programmed value shouldmatch the nominal value of the tube connected or in caseof older tubes theupperkV limit should be set to the max. application kV.Once an adaptation is completed the new limit value indicates as ADAPTED TO [kV].
Perform the following programmings temporarily for each tube connected to one of the assignedRGDV = Free cassetteSelect menu XRGSCOPE:PROGRAM/ REGISTRATION DEVICES/ RGDV#/ DATA SET A
Programming Temporarily Original Tube
Enable handswitch ...... YES
Syncmaster present NO
Exposure switch type Double Step Verify the customizedentries in 2Z--2.x
Exposure series / Tomo ...... YESentries in 2Z--2.x
Mounted radiographic ...... NONE
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--9 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.3.2.3. Procedure
RESET the generator.
It is recommended that the high tension be monitored during adaptation.Connect the scope:Channel1: kV AV HT at EZ130 X3 (1V/div), scale: 20kV/VTrigger external: CTRL_X_C/ at backpanel EZ X74, negative slopeTime base: 2ms/div
Select the RGDV = Free cassette for the tube to be adapted.
Select menu XRGSCOPE:OPTIMUS XRG/ ADJUST/ TUBE ADAPTATION
Select the tube and focus to be adapted, start with small focus!
NOTETo avoid any malfunction make sure that READY is displayed on the desk before transmitting data by pushing
<F2>:
READY state disappears, ADAP is displayed on the desk, WAITING is displayed on the PC screen.
Wait until the generator turns back to READY state.
Start the adaptation process by pushing the handswitch in PREP and EXP position continuously.
The generator switches about 125 exposures for each focus. The radiation sign at the desk indicates exposuresbut there is no beep at the end of each exposure.The actual kV parameters are displayed during adaptation.
The generator carries out the adaptation automatically. The procedure for one focus is completedwhen thedeskindication changes from ADAP to TEST. The WAITING message disappears from the PC screen together witha PC beep, followed by the screen: BEFORE CONTINUING THE GENERATOR MUST BE RESET.
RESET the generator.
Run the adaptation for each focus (small and large) and tube.
NOTEAs there is no tube type with a physical third (middle) focus yet, the third focus can not be adapted.
VARIOFOCUS values are calculated by adapted small and large focus. APR programs using VARIOFOCUS
can only be selected until small and large focus are both adapted.
Set RGDV(s) programming to original status according to table “RGDV programming” 2Z--2.x in the end of thismodul.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--10 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.3.3. Final tube adjustment work
1. BuckyDiagnost TH with CAN interface, DigitalDiagnost, Thoravision:
Switch OFF the generator.
Reestablish signal bus connector EZX23.
Reestablish CAN connectors EZX42--1 and EZX43--1.
Switch ON the generator.
2. All other systems:
Reset the generator.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--11 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.3.4. Problems during adaptation - Symptoms and solutions
1. A warning cannot be displayed on the control desk, the WAITING screen on the PC is flickering instead duringthis event and logged in the error log index.
2. If the tube has already been at a high temperature level (but the tube load indication still indicates green orgreen-yellow for 100%power) it might happen that the load indication changes straight to redand theadaptationis on hold. WAITING is flickering on the PC.Solution: Keep the handswitch pushed, once the temperature is down adaptation continues automatically.
NOTEAn increment of one of the temperature levels inhibits the 100% power condition. This event is always logged
as warning 00BV in the error log index.
3. Anerrormessage just flashes for a very shortmoment and is instantly covered byADAP on the desk afterwards.WAITING is flickering on the PC.
4. All buttons at the control desk including the RESET button are inactive during adaptation.The only way to RESET an error is to release the PREP switch which causes an interrupt similar to the RESETcommand.
5. After letting go of the PREP switchwait until the desk indicates READY. If READY does not appear at least after20 seconds run a warmstart of the generator by pushing the RESET button on CU EZ139.
6. If adaptation seems to do nothing for more than 30 seconds let go of the PREP switch. Wait until the deskindicates READY. If READY does not appear at least after 20 seconds run a warmstart of the generator bypushing the RESET button on CU EZ139.
7. If a constant READY indication appears for more than 2 seconds while PREP and EXP is activated by thehandswitch during adaptation let go of the handswitch.Wait until the desk indicates READY. If READY does not appear at least after 20 seconds run a warmstart ofthe generator by pushing the RESET button on CU EZ139.
8. If adaptation does not carry on with or without READY indication check whether one of the function unitsindicates a FATALerror by turning on the redLED. Let go of the handswitch and runawarmstart of thegeneratorby pushing the RESET button on CU EZ139.
9. If adaptation has been interrupted by a generator warmstart check the error log index before restartingadaptation:kV errors 02WG and/or 02WH indicate tube arcing. Run conditioning of the tube as described in chapter 1.3.1and/or reduce the max. kV value to the required application value.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--12 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.4. Dose rate control
1.4.1. AMPLIMAT sensitivity
Select menu:PROGRAM/ DOSE RATE CONTROL AMPLIMAT/ SENSITIVITY
Depending on HW programming of jumper EZ150:W4. W4 programs sensitivity accordingly:
high = × 4 = EZ150:W4 in position 1===> All screen/film combinations with a system speed > 200.
low = × 1 = EZ150:W4 in position 3===> At least one screen/film combination with a system speed ≤ 200.
1.4.2. Screen/film combinations
5 screen/film combinations can be programmed for each of the 5 measuring chambers:
Select menu:PROGRAM/ DOSE RATE CONTROL/ AMPLIMAT CHAMBER 1 ... 5/ DATA SET 1 ... 5
The number of the chamber corresponds to the specified unit number of the dose measuring unit.
The choice between automatic and manual DRC processing is possible when an authorized hardware key isinserted in the PC.
Automatic is selected as default and must be used for the initial programming.Data sets of adjacent rooms can be copied but have to be aligned afterwards.
Access manual DRC processing by pushing the <ESC> key.The manual mode is suitable for:
-- Copying complete programming to other measuring chambers.
-- Setting the basic density.
-- Changing the desk-displayed names of the programmed screen/film combinations.
-- Creating backups of the DRC programmings.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--13 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.4.2.1. Automatic DRC processing
Select the desired data from the files offered for the following programming steps.
The files are part of the installation software.
-- Select the programming field with the cursor and enter <RETURN>.
-- Enter the desired file from the list offered.
-- Select the desired data as required.
FILM File ”film.tdl”: Film types according to description of the manufacturer.
File ”film_bl/ _gr/ _uv.tdl”: General classification of the film according to color,sensitivity S and RLF compensation.
SCREEN File ”screen.tdl”: Screen types according to description of themanufacturer.
File ”lumat_lg.tdl”: Screen types according to luminous matter.
CHAMBER File ”chamber.tdl”: Different types of measuring chambers.
CASSETTE File ”cassette.tdl”: Different types of cassettes.
SYSTEM CORRECTION File ”syscor.tdl”: Select ”no corr. (ISO 9236-1)”.
CORRECTION FACTOR Default: 1.0 Correction factor for switch-OFF dose.
Basedon the combinationof the components entered, theprocessor calculates the switch-OFFdose, kVcorrectionand RLF compensation. The name for the screen/film combination, e.g. ”B400”, is taken from the “screen” defaultdata set.
NOTEFilm, screen, etc. data selected are not directly stored in the generator.
It is recommended that they be entered in the table ”Data sets of chambers” 2Z--4 at the end of this modul.
RESET the generator.
Color and sensitivity class of the screen/film combination are displayed on the desk, e.g.: “B400”.Other screen/film combinations (data set 1 ... 5) for the chamber can be selected by the buttons.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--14 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.4.2.2. Manual DRC processing
The current data set of the screen/film combination is displayed.
* Abbreviation: Abbreviation for the screen/film combination.Example: B400 = blue, speedclass 400.
Dose Request Chamber: Senstitivity of the measuring chamber type in [mGy/V].
* Dose of FSC: Switch-OFF dose of the screen/film combination in [mGy].Linear ratio with respect to the film density.
kV70-Char. U_0 ... 9: Checkpoints for kV-dependent density correction.
kV70-Char. Drel_0 ... 9: Relative correction value for the dose.
RLF t_0 ... 9: Checkpoints for time-dependent density correction.(RLF = Reciprocity Law Failure).
RLF Drel_0 ... 9: Relative correction value for the dose.
* = Only these fields may be changed according to the system requirements.All other fields must not be changed.
If required, change the data and the abbreviation name.Usually no value except the basic density ”Dose of FSC” must be changed (see next page).
Transmit the data set with <F2>.
RESET the generator.
The SAVE <F3> and LOAD <F4> functions of XRGSCOPE permit straightforward copying of the measuringchamber programmings.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--15 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.4.2.3. Density correction for AEC technique (option)
Basic density per screen/film combination:
A hardware key is required at the PC for direct access to the switch-OFF dose.
S Make a test exposure for each screen/film combination.To do so, set the density correction = 0.
S Determine the density of the test exposures.
S Select menu:PROGRAM/ DOSE RATE CONTROL/ AMPLIMAT/ CHAMBER 1 ... 5/ DATA SET 1 ... 5
S Select manual DRC programming by pushing the <ESC> key.
S Correct the switch-OFF dose = “Dose of FSC” according to formular below:
Desired densityNew switch-OFF dose = -------------------------------- x Old switch-OFF dose
Measured density
S Transmit the data set by pushing the <F2> key.
S Repeat the procedure for each screen/film combination at each chamber.
S RESET the generator.
The switch-OFF dose can be set on the PC even without a hardware key.To do so, call up the automatic DRC programming, repeat all the selections and change the correction factor forswitch-OFF dose accordingly. Each time this programming is called up all the selections must be repeated.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--16 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.4.3. Fault exposure detection
Fault exposure detection is switched ON as a default for AEC and TDC. If in the initial phase of an exposure toolittle dose is measured, the exposure is aborted to protect the patient.
-- Time of control measurement: 10% of backup time,min. 250ms at TDC
-- Dose minimum: 4% of set density voltage at AEC,4 ... 10% at TDC
-- Backup time AEC: Calculated time from 9.5 times mAs of the respective 2-factor technique,max. 4s
-- Backup time TDC: Exposure time set 0.3 ... 6s
This additional precaution can be switched OFF for both techniques individually in the menu:PROGRAM/ DOSE RATE CONTROL/ FAULT EXPOSURE DETECTION/ AEC OR TDC
For details see section “FAULT FINDING”, chapter “OPTIMUS AEC switch-OFF philosophy”.
This monitoring does not take effect in the following cases, irrespective of programming:
-- Using screen/film combinations with high speed in AEC technique.
-- Exposure time in TDC technique is shorter than 1s.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--17 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.5. Application limits
1.5.1. X-mode limits
Using the menu:PROGRAM/ APPLICATION LIMITS/ X-MODE LIMITS
Limit values can be defined for all available techniques. Some values look as if they are out of limit which they areindeed, but there are additional basic limit values programmed in the generator firmware. These are exposuretechnique dependent.
As an example the field of the ”Falling Load” technique:
X-ray Mode: AEC falling load kVMin. Time Limit [ms]: [1.00]Max. Time Limit [ms]: [60000.00]Min. Current Time Product Limit [mAs]: [0.001]Max. Current Time Product Limit [mAs]: [580.000]
Min. Time Limit [ms]: Is always 1ms for all non-AEC (Automatic Exposure Control) techniques.Exposures with AEC might be switched shorter than 1ms.
Max. Time Limit [ms]: Basic limits are technique dependent and can not be changed or increased:
AEC falling load kV 4000msAEC fixed current kV-mA 4000msTDC (Tomo Density Control) 6000ms
kV-mA-ms 16000msfree techniques kV-mAs 16000ms
kV-mAs-ms 16000ms
Min. Current Time Product Limit [mAs]: The smallest mAs - product is 0.5mAs.AEC exposures with less than 0.5mAs are possible.
Max. Current Time Product Limit [mAs]: The default mAs - product is 580mAs for all AEC-techniques.850mAs is the absolute limit the generator terminates.
NOTELocal limits have to be taken into consideration.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--18 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.5.2. Thoravison limits
The kV-dependent mAs limits can be accessed via the menu:PROGRAM/ APPLICATION LIMITS/ THORAVISION LIMITS
They are activated only in conjunction with an online Thoravision unit.A change may only be made if instructed to do so by the service center.
Reference files on floppy disk: -- ref_limx.tdl X-ray limits
Reference files on system disk Thoravision: -- TH_LI128.tdl-- TH_LI64.tdl-- TH_LI32.tdl = ref_limt.tdl
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--19 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.6. Human interface
Note
The Optimus generator of this system might has been delivered without APRoption.Before spending time trying to load APR check:
XRGSCOPE>> Faultfind
>> Power ON Results>> APR disabled: [No ] = APR option present
APR disabled: [Yes] = No APR possible
If APR shall be possible orderMGR 0011 (change of an existing configuration)MGR 2181 APR
with the generator serial number.
A maximum of up to 1024 APRs can be stored in the generator.
On a single RGDV button either up to 80 APRs can be programmed directly (10 pages of 8 each) or up to 400APRsvia menus.
The initial data sets are called ### APR name ### and they all have the same exposure parameters.
They can be directly assigned or via menu and submenu levels to registration devices RGDV 1 ... 8.
In case TEST APR is displayed after selection of a registration device, at least this particular registration devicehas not been assigned to any APRs.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--20 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.6.1. Additional program settings for generators without option APR
In case of a generator without option APR9890 000 0282x, the menu/APRdisplay fieldmust be dark until selectionof all exam./aux. units.If it does not work AR_EMPTY.tdl must be loaded from the service disk for each exam./aux. unit.
In case TEST- APR appears in the menu/APR display field upon selection of the exam./aux. units, theAR_EMPTY.tdl can be loaded immediately because no APR/T is assigned to the exam./aux. unit.
In case another APR or menu appears on the desk it must be deleted before the AR_EMPTY.tdl can be loaded:
Delete the APR/T under each exam./aux. unit.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/MANUAL ASSIGNMENT/ DELETE MENU
After a RESET of the generator TEST APR appears in the menu/APR display field for each exam./aux. unit.
Now the AR_EMPTY.tdl can be loaded from the service disk for all exam./aux. units.
Load AR_EMPTY.tdl for all exam./aux. units.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/PREDEFINED ASSIGNMENTS
A list of possible TDL-files appears on the screen.
Select file ”AR_EMPTY.tdl” from the list.
Only “none APR” appears.
Extended APR data table
No APR Name Tomono.
Foc V[%]
kV mA ms mAs Dose[µGy]
Dens. Fieldsl m r
Techniquepref background
SpectralFilter
FSC Fluo.Curve
MenuName
SubmenuName
1 buckytable 1 1 77 600.0 53.3 32.0 2.50 0 m RAEC RUQ none 400 1
2 tomography 1 1 77 16.0 2000.0 32.0 2.50 0 m RAEC RUQt none 400 1
3 wallstand 1 1 77 600.0 53.3 32.0 2.50 0 m RAEC RUQ none 400 1
4 free cassette 1 1 77 600.0 53.3 32.0 2.50 0 m RAEC RUQ none 400 1
Select it for each active exam./aux. unit.
After a RESET of the generator the menu/APR display field is dark for all exam./aux. units.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--21 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.6.2. Language
Assign the desired language.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ SELECT LANGUAGE
A language menu appears:
-- English
-- German
-- French
-- Spanish
Select the desired language.
RESET the generator.
A table lists which characters can be displayed on the control desk and how they can be indicated/entered at theservice PC, e.g. for APR names, see 2Z--3 “List of characters”.
Certain characters can be generated at the PC only via the decimal code. To do so, push the <ALT> key on thePC and enter the numerical code.
1.6.3. Automatic programming of APRs (option)
NOTEPay attention in the rules of “PC and generator settings to avoid problems during up/downloading of
CU complete files” described in modul “Software XRGSCOPE” chapter 1.1 of this section.
The installation disk contains data files for a complete, typical APR programming in different languages.Standard APR programs for each application can easily and quickly be loaded for each registration device.
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/PREDEFINED ASSIGNMENTS
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--22 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
All files consist of the the same format “A***my**.tdl”
Select with <TAB> and <UP--/DOWN-ARROWS> one of the files listed:
AR_EMPTY = for generators without APR option 9890 000 0282x
A******* = APR data file
***my** = Release month / year
*TS..V = Bucky TS with VARIOFOCUS RO 1648, RO 1750, SRO 2550 SRO 33 100
*T..V9 = Bucky TS with VARIOFOCUS SRO 0951
*CO = Cosmos
*D = DigitalDiagnost
*R = Radiography
*TR = Trauma
*TS = BuckyTS
*V = VARIOFOCUS RO 1648, RO 1750, SRO 2550, SRO 33 100
*V9 = VARIOFOCUS SRO 0951
*M = Mono focus tube
*P = Pediatrics
***DE(U) = German version
***ES(P) = Spanish version
***EN(G) = English version
***FR(A) = French version
Example: A D 91 V 9 EN.tdl
| | | | | |
| | | | | English version
| | | | Tube SRO 0951
| | | VARIOFOCUS
| | Release: September 2001
| DigitalDiagnost
APR data file
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--23 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
Some files contain data sets in a window: Available Examination Unit Type
Select one of the files listed and load it:
BUCKY GR = Bucky table APR group layer (menu technique)
BUCKY PA = Bucky table APR paging (scrolling through pages technique)
WALLSTAND GR = Bucky wallstand group
WALLSTAND PA = Bucky wallstand paging
FREE GR = Free technique (non-AEC) group
FREE PA = Free technique (non-AEC) paging
TOMO LT/HDH = Linear tomography with units HDH, BTS2, BTS4 group
TOMO LIN/PA = Linear tomography with units HDH, BTS2, BTS4 paging
TOMO BTC GR = Tomography with unit BuckyDiagnost TC group
TOMO BTC PA = Tomography with unit BuckyDiagnost TC paging
TOMO BTH GR = Tomography with unit BuckyDiagnost TH group
TOMO BTH PA = Tomography with unit BuckyDiagnost TH paging
Repeat this procedure for each registration device.
RESET the generator.
Now all APR programs which have been loaded are displayed on the desk.
If required:
Change the menus and the assignments of the APRs according to chapter 1.6.4.
Change the names and the contents of the APRs according to chapter 1.6.5.
NOTEIn case a complete APR program setting has to be replaced by another program setting, all other APR program
settings under the registration device concerned must be deleted first.
Use APRMAN.
For deleting a program setting call menu:
PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUAL
ASSIGNMENTS/ DELETE MENU
and select the blank line.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--24 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.6.4. Manual programming of APRs (option)
Use APRMAN.Select service menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/MANUAL ASSIGNMENT/ . . .
139H94
Manual APR and menu assignment possibilities via XRGSCOPE
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
. . . / APR Assignment / Assign APR( . . . / APR Deassign / Deassign APR )
Registration devicesRGDV 1...8
. . . / Menu Assignment / Assign Menu( . . . / Delete Menu )( . . . / Move Menu )( . . . / Rename Menu )
max. 10 pages
Submenu 1/1 1/2
2/1 2/2
3/1 3/2
4/1 MENU 2of4
max. 10 pages
Menu 1/1 1/2
2/1 2/2
3/1 3/2
4/1 4/2
max. 10 pages
APR 1/1 1/2
2/1 2/2
3/1 3/2
4/1 4/2
Next pageName field
Higher menu
Field coordinates not displayed
To deallocate menus, submenus or APR data
use the programming menus put in brackets ( ).
. . . / APR Assignment / Select Menu
. . . / APR Assignment / Assign APR( . . . / APR Deassign / Select Menu )( . . . / APR Deassign / Deassign APR )
RESET the generator
Changing ( e. g. name ):
Select APR from desk.
Program/ Human Interface/ APR Data Set . . .
. . . / Select APR Data Set
. . . / Change APR Data Set
. . . / Menu Assignment / Select Menu
. . . / Menu Assignment / Assign Menu( . . . / Delete Menu )( . . . / Move Menu )( . . . / Rename Menu )
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--25 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.6.4.1. Creating menus
Assign the desired menu.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/ASSIGN MENU
Enter the first menu name, e.g. <Body region 1>.
If required, change the location suggested in the display. Otherwise the next vacant location is assigned.
Enter the second menu name, e.g. <Body region 2>.
Etc.
1.6.4.2. Creating sub menus
Assign the desired sub menu.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/MENU ASSIGNMENT/ SELECT MENU
Select with the <CURSOR> from one of the windows a menu to be assigned with submenus.
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/MENU ASSIGNMENT/ ASSIGN MENU
Enter the first submenu name, e.g. <Left side>.
If required, change the location suggested in the display. Otherwise the next vacant location is assigned.
Enter the second submenu name, e.g. <Right side>.
Etc.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--26 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.6.4.3. Assigning APRs
Assign desired APRs.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/APR ASSIGNMENT/ SELECT MENU
Select with the <CURSOR> from one of the windows a menu or submenu.If no menu layer is desired, proceed.
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/APR ASSIGNMENT/ ASSIGN APR
Select from one of the windows an initial APR or an APR which has not been assigned.
Initial APR: ### APR name ###
Not assigned APR: e.g. <Thorax ap>
If required, change the location suggested in the display. Otherwise the next vacant location is assigned.
Assign the next APR.
Etc.
RESET the generator.
Only after a RESET of the generator the menus, submenus and APRs are displayed on the desk.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--27 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.6.5. Changing of APR radiation parameters
Select the APR to be changed on the desk, e.g. ### APR name ###.
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ SELECT APR DATA SET
The number of the APR selected on the desk is displayed. Transmit data by pushing <F2>.
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ CHANGE APR DATA SET
Change the contents of the APR, e.g. <NAME>, <kV> etc.
Select the kV value according to the dose-equivalent series:40--41--42--44--46--48--50--52--55--57--60--63--66--70--73--77--81--85--90--96--102--109--117--125--133--141--150 kV.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--28 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
Parameter Value Remark
APR number 1 ... 1024
APR name up to 16 characters
Focus− ∆ small− ∆ vario− ∆ large
VARIOFOCUS ratio [%] 20%, 35%, 50%, 65%, 80% of small focus
Dose measurement field (left) ∆ ON/OFFAEC operable
Dose measurement field (middle) ∆ ON/OFFAEC operableonly if at least
fi ld i ONDose measurement field (right) ∆ ON/OFF
yone field is ON
Preferred technique --non automatic--automatic
AEC technique-- AEC falling load kV-- AEC fixed current kV-mA-- TDC
No AEC technique-- kV-mA-ms-- kV-mAs-- kV-mAs-ms
Tube current max. factor [%] 1 ... 100
PSC U thin (dose equiv. steps) 0 ... 5
PSC U thick (dose equiv. steps) 0 ... 5
PSC Q thin (6% steps) 0 ... 10
PSC Q thick (6% steps) 0 ... 10
PSC dens. thin (6% steps) 0 ... 10 (max. limit = 8)
PSC dens. thick (6% steps) 0 ... 10 (max. limit = 8)
Exposure data U [kV] ∆ 40 ... 150
Exposure data I [mA] ∆ 0.1 ... 2000
Exposure data Q [mAs] ∆ 0,5 ... 850
Exposure time [ms] ∆ 1 ... 16000 (60000)
Exposure data density (6% steps) ∆ --40 ... +40 (max. limit = ±8)
Screen/film combination ∆ RGDV dependent Default = Data Set 1
Tomo no. 1 ... 16 assignment of a tomographic figure
Spectral filter
-- none-- 2mm Al-- 0.1mm Cu + 1mm Al-- 0.2mm Cu + 1mm Al
Default = none
* Fluoroscopy curve N/A no function
∆ = The basic setting of these data can also be performed from the desk (RESET + APR).Refer to the operator’s manual.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--29 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
The following parameters must also be taken into account for AEC techniques:
-- mAs: basis for calculating the backup time for AEC, the tube current for AEC fixed current (kV-mA)and the initial mA value for TDC
-- t: exposure time for TDC and AEC fixed currentFor details see chapters 1.6.5.2 and 1.7.
If AEC FIXED CURRENT kV-mA or TDC is programmed as the preferred technique, the kV/mA/s or kV/mAs/stechnique must be selected under NO AEC TECHNIQUE.
Transmit data by pushing <F2>.
Select the next APR on the desk, select it in the programming menu and change it.
Etc.
RESET the generator.
Organ-dependent correction:
S Select the APR to be changed on the desk.
S Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ CHANGE APR DATA SET
Transmit the displayed APR number by pushing the <F2> key.
S Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ CHANGE APR DATA SET
S Exposure data density: --40 ... +40 = correction in steps of 6%. Max. limit = ±8.
The number of correction steps must match the programmed step rate.
Example:The desk display has been programmed to 12% step rate in the menu:PROGRAM/ REGISTRATION DEVICE/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ DATA SET B/ DENSITY STEPS
To be able to display a density correction of +1 for a certain APR, two corrections steps (2 x 6% = 12%) mustbe programmed under this APR.
S Select the next APR on the desk, select it in the programming menu and change it.
Etc.
S RESET the generator.
Correction for each RGDV 1 ... 8:
This correction is possible but for reasons of clarity it should not be used.
S Select menu:PROGRAM/ REGISTRATION DEVICE/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ DATA SET B
S Density correction: --8 ... +8 = correction in steps of 6%.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--30 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.6.5.1. Density correction for non-AEC techniques
The supplied APR standard sets are mostly based on a screen/film combination with a speed class of 400.APR’s for extremities and some other applications are based on a 100 or 200-type system. Depending on the localsituation the mAs or s parameters of all the relevant APRs must be adapted.
Example:The customer uses a 200-type system. To change from the existing 400 values the relevant APRs must bereprogrammed to double the mAs products or to double the exposure time (400 divided by 200 = 2).
Select the relevant APR at the control desk.
Set the new parameters at the control desk.
Save the new parameters as default values.To do this push the RESET button and the corresponding APR button. The asterisk in the APR name as anindication of overwritten data disappears.Use APRMAN.
1.6.5.2. AEC fixed current (kV-mA)
For this exposure technique the APRs must have the following programmings:
-- Dose measurement field: ON (at least 1 field must be set to ON)
-- Preferred technique: automatic
-- AEC technique: AEC fixed current kV-mA
-- No AEC technique: kV-mAs-ms technique (RUQT) or kV-mA-ms (RUIT)
-- Exposure data U: = anatomical kV value
-- Exposure data Q/I: = anatomical mAs/mA product based on the screen/film combination used
-- Exposure time t: = anatomical exposure time
The mA value is calculated automatically.
In the APR standard files supplied the following APR’s is programmed to kV-mA technique:
Dens axis F / dens axis F / dens axis F / atlas F( German / English / French / Spanish )
The APR is marked with F.
The mAs value is based on a 400-type screen/film combination andmust be adapted to the combinations actuallyused.E. g.: If a 200-type combination is used, the mAs value must be doubled.
If the TDC option is installed, the preferable technique for all exposures is the one where the exposure time is thedetermining factor. TDC is not restricted to tomography applications only.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--31 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.6.6. Moving / copying of an APR data set
Determination of the number of APR data set X to where APR data set Y is to be moved / copied.
Select APR data set X on the desk.
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ SELECT APR DATA SET
Note down the number of APR data set X, e.g. 100.
Changing of the number of APR data set Y to be moved / copied to the number of APR data set X
Select APR data set Y on the desk.
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ SELECT APR DATA SET
Transmit by pushing <F2>.
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ CHANGE APR DATA SET
Replace the number of APR data set Y with the number of APR data set X in the input mask, e.g. nnn⇒ 100.
Transmit this number by pushing <F2>.
RESET the generator.
APR data set Y is displayed in place of the old APR data set X on the desk.In case APR data set Y is merely moved and not copied to the location of APR data set X, the original APR dataset Y must be deleted at the end of programming.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--32 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.6.7. Deleting of APRs
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/APR DEASSIGN/ SELECT MENU
Required only if the APR is assigned to a menu or submenu.
Select the associated menu or submenu from one of the windows.
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/APR DEASSIGN/ DEASSIGN APR
Select the APR to be deleted from one of the windows.
RESET the generator.
An APR which has been deleted is no longer displayed on the desk but remains stored in the generator.It can be re-activated according to chapter 1.6.4.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--33 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.6.8. Manipulating menus
Deleting:
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/DELETE MENU
Select the menu or submenu to be deleted from one of the windows.For deleting all APRs of an RGDV program select the blank line.
RESET the generator.
Shifting:
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/MOVE MENU
Select the menu or submenu from one of the windows.
Enter the new positions.
RESET the generator.
Renaming:
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ MANUALASSIGNMENT/RENAME MENU
Select the menu or submenu from one of the windows.
Enter the name in the lowermost line.
RESET the generator.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--34 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.6.9. External APR assignment
A maximum of 2 external APRT modules can be connected to the OPTIMUS R/F via adapter 4 auxil. units 1WAand 2WA.Refer Z1--15.1 ”Adapter 4 auxil. units”.
Define the external APRT modules by placing links W1 through W3 on adapter WA.Also see table ”Assignment of the external APRT modules” below and Z1--15.1 ”Adapter 4 auxil. units”.
Program the desired APRT in the generator.
Select the desired APRT numbers for the external APRT modules from the RGDVs:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ SELECT APR DATA SET
Program the RGDVs that are to be switched over by the external APRT modules.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ EXTERNAL APRASSIGNMENT/ ...
.... DEVICE INTERFACE 1or
* .... DEVICE INTERFACE 3
Only two RGDVs can be programmed and, respectively, switched over. Once programmed these two RGDVs arevalid irrespective of the selected APRs of the other buttons of the module.
Program the APRs that are to be selected by the external APR/T modules.Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENT/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ EXTERNAL APRASSIGNMENT/...
.... DEVICE INTERFACE 1 : 6 APR keys can be assigned for each RGDVand/or
.... DEVICE INTERFACE 2 : 8 APR keys can be assigned for each RGDVand/orand/or
* .... DEVICE INTERFACE 3 : 8 APR keys can be assigned for each RGDV
Enter the RGDVs and APRs programmed for the 3 device interfaces in table 2Z--5 ”Programming of deviceinterfaces”.
A A
RR
AA
A A
*WB
RR SCOPOMAT
A A
AA
AA
A A
A A
AA
AA
A A
WA / * 1WB 2WA / *WB
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--35 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
Assignment of the external APRT modules:
Deviceinterface Adapter
ProgrammingW1/W2/W3 Hardware connection Remark
1WAor
1 WAW1--W3 open
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 PO26V
SLPG 3
SLPG 4
SLPG 5
SLPG 6
RGDVSL (n)
RGDVSL (m)
SLPG 1
SLPG 2
WAX23
2 selectable RGDVs can beprogrammed. They areindependent of the APRsprogrammed.
Maximum number of APRs:6 x 8 (RGDV) = 48 APRs
Recommendation:2 APRs assigned to each button.
2 2 WA only W1 closed
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SLPG 5
SLPG 6
SLPG 7
SLPG 8
PO26V
SLPG 1
SLPG 2
SLPG 3
SLPG 4
2 WAX23
RGDV cannot be selected.
Maximum number of APRs:8 x 8 (RGDV) = 64 APRs
Recommendation:2 APRs assigned to each button.
Operation as 2 WA is possible alsowithout 1 WA.Refer to drawing Z2--15.1
Cabinet wiring:Decade adapter WA
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--36 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.7. Option: Tomo Density Control TDC
For this exposure technique the APRs must have the following programming:
-- Dose measurement field: ON (at least 1 field must be set to ON)
-- Preferred technique: automatic
-- AEC technique: TDC
-- No AEC technique: kV-mAs-ms technique (RUQT) or kV-mA-ms (RUIT)
-- Exposure data U: = anatomical kV
-- Exposure data Q/I: = anatomical mAs/mA product based on the screen/film combination used
-- Exposure time t: = anatomical exposure time
The mAs product is used to calculate the start current, indicated under “Exposure data I”.In the APR files supplied all the APRs for tomography applications are programmed to TDC. If there is no TDCoption installed, the manual technique is selected as the preferred technique automatically.
TDC is not restricted to tomography applications only so it can be preferred for all exposures where exposure timeis the determining factor.
The respective mAs product is generally based on a 400-type screen/film combination andmust be adapted to thecombinations actually used.E. g.: If a 200-type combination is used, the mAs product must be doubled.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS RAD Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--37 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.8. Option: VARIOFOCUS
For the VARIOFOCUS option, special APR files have to be loaded. These are designatedwith a ”V” in the file nameand contain correspondingly defined APRs.
VARIOFOCUS is programmed as a percentage mix of the small focus with the large focus.The following steps are possible:20%, 35%, 50%, 65% and 80% of the small focus.Default: 50%.
The percentage mix is not displayed directly on the control desk and can only be estimated indirectly via thesmall/large focus exposure time.
It is only possible to display and change the percentage mix via XRGSCOPE.
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR DATA SET/ CHANGE APR DATA SET
However, VARIOFOCUS can be selected via the control desk and can be stored as default focus for an APR,too.The default ratio is always 50%.
VARIOFOCUS is possible for tubes with superimposed focal spots only.
The following tubes are suitable for the application: RO 1648, RO 1750, SRO 0951, SRO 2550, SRO 33 100.
1.9. Option: Area Dose Calculator
This option operates in conjunction with a unit and a collimator which are CAN-controlled and supply informationabout SID, collimation and added filters only.
See subsystem manual OPTIMUS RAD section 6: ADJUSTMENTSchapter 1.x: Checking / Correction
1.10. Acceptance test
Execute the acceptance test.See subsystem manual OPTIMUS RAD section 7: ACCEPTANCE
Observe all applicable national regulations.
For U.S.A applications check the H.H.S requirements!
After completition of setting-to-work, the system must be tested for H.H.S. compliance according the P.M.S.I.comprehensive compliance testing workbook: Numeric code 4535 800 2035x.
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS RAD
(02.0)4--38 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06121
1.11. Interlock facility for APR modification
Select menu:PROGRAM/ HUMAN INTERFACE/ APR MODIFIABLE BY USER
It is possible to prevent a customer from being able to store APRmodifications as default setting via the controldesk.
Default: YES
1.12. Backup of all configuration data
A hardware key is required for the PC.
To save the configuration data use the CONFIGURATION BACKUP disk supplied.
Save the complete SW programming of the generator on the floppy disk by using the menu:ACCEPT/ BACKUP/ ...
1. ... RGDV RELATED ASSIGNMENTS/ RGDV 1 ... 8/ APR ASSIGNMENTS
Use APRMAN.
After READING (turning bar) the PC offers the default backup name:Backup filename: APR_BAK1 ... 8.tdlThe name can be changed into any other file name.The path (harddisk) is automatically taken into account.It is also possible to type:
A:\”filename” <RETURN>to load the backup files directly to the floppy disk.
2. ... CU complete
NOTEPay attention to the rules of “PC and generator settings to avoid problems during up/downloading of
CU complete files” described in modul “Software XRGSCOPE” chapter 1.1 of this section.
A disk space of 700kByte is required.It takes about 8min to save the data to the disk.
The default backup name:Backup File Name: CUBACKUP.TDLThe name can be changed into any other filename.The path (harddisk) is automatically taken into account.It is also possible to type:
A:\”filename” <RETURN>to load the backup files directly to the floppy disk.
J
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
X1:C
27SL
TO
TM
8
X1:A
27SL
TO
TM
7
X1:C
26SL
TO
TM
6
X1:A
26
X1:C
25
SL T
O T
M 5
X1:A
25
SL T
O T
M 4
10tra
ject
orie
s
WA / 1WA / 2WAAdapter 4 auxil. units
Z1-15.1
X2:A
9
X2:C
9
CO
M E
X C
D
X1:A
24
X1:C
24
EX C
D
IT 0
V
SL T
O T
M 1
SL T
O T
M 2
SL T
O T
M 3
K18
10R
EX O
N
X1:C
19
X1:A
12
X1:C
12
SW B
U 1
SW B
U 2
4 5 8
10
9
8 9
X1:A
21
X14
1 2 3
X13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X AC
T/
EX C
D
t
500.
..600
ms
RQ
PQ
/
EXO
N
t
X1:A
10
4
3
4
X1:A
4
4
X1:C
6
3 4
X1:C
8
PO 2
6V R
E
X1:C
10
X1:A
C1
6 7 10
X1:C
205 6 7 82 3 4
codi
ng
gene
rato
r CAN
hig
h ac
tive
gene
rato
r CAN
low
act
ive
Expa
nsio
ns
GN
D S
or P
O 0
V
NR
PR
X/
PO 2
6V
expo
sure
end
grou
nd
com
mon
for e
xpos
ure
end
expo
sure
on
PO 2
6V R
E
RES
ET C
/
sign
al b
us e
nabl
e X-
ray
RQ
PR
/R
G D
V 1.
..4
sign
al b
us X
-ray
requ
est c
omm
and
RQ
PR
HS
sign
al b
us g
roun
d
+26V
sup
ply
emitt
er 0
V ex
posu
re o
n si
gnal
+26V
sup
ply
reve
rse
not r
eady
pre
parin
g fo
r X-ra
y
regi
stra
tion
devi
cesy
stem
RES
ET c
omm
and
requ
est p
repa
ratio
n
SW T
O 1
SW S
F C
F 2
SW T
O 2
TOM
O P
GTO
PG
1...
8TO
PG
SL
(SW
pro
gram
mab
le in
Dat
a Se
t A)
requ
est p
repa
ratio
n fro
m h
ands
witc
h
X AC
T/
V15
S or
PO
V
requ
est X
-ray
gene
rato
r for
exp
osur
e
switc
h bu
cky
2
XG R
D E
X 1.
..4
requ
est X
-ray
gene
rato
r for
fluo
rosc
opy
switc
h to
mog
raph
y 1
tom
o pr
ogra
m
switc
h to
mog
raph
y 2
sele
ct X
-ray
gene
rato
r for
tom
ogra
phy
tom
o m
ode
prog
ram
med
tom
o pr
ogra
m s
elec
ted
sign
al b
us +
15V
supp
ly
sign
al b
us X
-ray
activ
e
switc
h si
de fi
eld
to c
entra
l fie
ld b
ucky
mea
surin
g ch
ambe
r 1sw
itch
side
fiel
d to
cen
tral f
ield
buc
ky m
easu
ring
cham
ber 2
X-ra
y ge
nera
tor r
eady
for e
xpos
ure
requ
est
10
X1:A
13
X2:A
25R
Q S
N X
/
K13
PO 2
6V
RQ
XG
PR
1
RQ
XG
PR
2
RQ
XG
PR
3
RQ
XG
PR
4
X41:
1 PO 2
6V
CTR
L X/
RD
PR
X
X2:C
25
EN X
/N
R P
R X
/X2
:C26
W1
Selft
est
Star
t
Rea
dy
Erro
r
CAN
- an
noun
cem
ent
+m
ax.:
26V
1
10m
A
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Tom
o
X22
Tom
o tim
es
35
Form
at
6 7
(97.0)
8 9 10
X1:C
31
ADAP
_ b
ADAP
_ a
ADAP
_ a
===
2WA
1WA
WA
Func
tion
unit
Philips Medical Systems
Rel
ease
con
trol
(gal
vani
c de
coup
led)
1
2X23
4 5 6 7 8 9
SLPG
1
SLPG
2
SLPG
3
SLPG
4
SLPG
5
SLPG
6
6 7
Schr
./Kö
A1/A
3
Rel
ease
1(5
)
X2R
elea
se 2
(6)
c
Rel
ease
3(7
)
X3
)
Rel
ease
4(8
)
from
451
2 10
8 08
043
onw
ards
:- K
1 in
XG
RD
EX c
ircui
t
- sig
nal E
X C
D a
dded
K1V9
max
. 26V
,5A
1 3 10
+
+26V
GN
D2
RQ
PR
HS
RQ
XG
PR
02-0
3-19
X1 1
- V9
: max
. I in
crea
sed
from
1A
to 5
A
X1:A
3
+5V
8 9
K1
K14
K15
X1:C
4
Rel
ease
1...
4
K16
X1:A
7
RG
DV
1
K17
X1:A
9
X1:A
11
X1:A
5
5
8 9
X2:A
C14
V15
SPO
V
DC
GN
D S
X2:A
C15
PO 0
V
DC
CAN
H
CAN
L
RES
ET C
/
X2:A
C27
CO
D 1
CO
D 2
CO
D 3
+15V
X2:C
3
X2:A
3
X2:A
6
X2:A
21
X2:C
21
X2:A
22
Buck
y 2(
4)
X12
open
ed:
X11
1
2 3 4
SW S
F C
F 1
SW S
F C
F 2
Test
PR
EP
S2
Test
FLU
OR
O
S1
X1:A
30
X1:C
30
X21
TO P
G 1
TO P
G 2
TO P
G 3
TO P
G 4
TO P
G 5
TO P
G 6
TO P
G 7
X1:C
13
X1:A
14
X1:C
14
X1:A
15
X1:C
15
X1:A
16
SL P
G 7
X1:C
16
X1:A
17
X1:C
17
X41:
2
X52
W2
W1
W2
W3
requ
est s
ynch
roni
zatio
nR
Q S
N X
/R
Q X
G E
XR
Q X
G F
LR
Q X
G P
R1.
..4
inte
rface
K5 K4 K7 K6
PO 2
6VX AC
T/ W12
W13
GN
D 2
X42:
2
7
RG
DVS
L(n)
RG
DVS
L(m
)
WA
or 1
WA
2WA
I/O
Bidi
rect
iona
l
inte
rface
stat
us
X1:A
28
X1:C
28
X1:A
31
H1
K9
X1:A
18
X1:A
20
X1:C
18
X1:A
19
SL X
G T
O
SW T
O 1
SW T
O 2
9
EXO
N
1010
CM
EX
SW 1
clos
ed:
CM
EX
SW 2
CM
EX
SW 3
CM
EX
SW 4
X1:C
11
TO P
G 1
...8
K12
TO P
G S
L
RG
DV
2
RG
DV
35
RG
DV
45
RQ
XG
FL
6
GN
D 2
6 7
6 7 9
8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5PTC
X24
SL P
G 1
TOM
O P
G
SL P
G 2
SL P
G 3
TO P
G S
L
SL P
G 4
SL P
G 5
SL P
G 6
PO 2
6V
PO 2
6V
SL C
O 1
SL C
O 2
WA
1WA X5
1X4 1
1R
Q X
G E
X1
TO P
G 8
Exte
rnal
APR
T
K3
C75
I/O brai
n
X2:A
C28
2
Tom
o
X1:A
C2
X1:C
5
X1:C
7
X1:C
9
K14.
..K17
K4...
K11
K1R
Q P
R/
RQ
XG
FL
+26V
2 4 5 6 7 8 9
K2
GN
D2
W3
K8 K11
K10
K12
CAN
/XS
bus
PO 2
6V R
E
X42:
1
5
for
for
EZX4
5/
orEZ
X19
EZX4
5or
/W
NX2
1
1WA
X42
/ 1
WA
X52
for
2W
A
X2:A
24
X2:C
24
RQ
PR
/
sele
ct c
orre
ctio
n 1
(thic
knes
s)se
lect
cor
rect
ion
2 (th
ickn
ess)
sele
ct e
xt A
PRT
prog
ram
sele
ct to
mo
time
switc
h bu
cky
1
requ
est X
-ray
gene
rato
r for
pre
para
tion
com
mon
for e
xpos
ure
switc
h of
regi
stra
tion
devi
ce
SL C
O 1
SL C
O 2
SL P
G 1
...8
SL T
O T
M 1
...8
SL X
G T
OSW
BU
1SW
BU
2SW
SF
CF
1
K14
X1:C
3XG
RD
EX
1
K15
X1:A
6XG
RD
EX
2
6 7 8 9 10
SL P
G 8
Tom
o m
ode
X1:A
32
2
2XG
RD
EX
3X1
:A8
K16
K17
Tom
o re
ady
Buck
y re
ady
X1:C
32
102
EXO
N
Uni
vers
al
Inte
rface
Log
ic
I/O in
terfa
ce
I/O
Bidi
rect
iona
l
K14
K15
K16
K17
X1:A
29
X1:C
29
CAN
HC
AN L
CO
D1.
..3
Mne
mon
ics
EN X
/
CTR
L X/
EX C
D
CO
M E
X C
D
EX O
N
W11
CM
EX
SW 1
...4
GN
D 2
IT 0
V
3
2
max
. I
= 1A
XG R
D E
X 4
3 8 10
Buck
y 1(
3)
1
cont
act
4512 983 05571
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Cabinet rear side Cabinet rear side
X42
X22
WA X41
X52
X45
WB X41
(Photomultiplier)
WP
X41Z X19
WA X51
2WA X51
X52
2WA X41
X52
X51X51
WB X52WA X52
CAN/XS
Z X14
X45
WB X51
X19WB X41
Z
Z2-15.1
WA/WB/WPCabinet wiring:
WB X42
X42
X41
2WA
WA X51
Z X45
WA X41
X52
X51
X42
2WA X41 (2x WA)
WP
Adapter Photomultiplier (SEV)Decade adapter 4 auxil. units
(97.0)
A3/A
3
c Philips Medical Systems
CAN/XS termination resistor is alweys installed at the end of the chain!
02-0
3-19
X19
X32
X52
WP X11
termination resistor
WA X51
WB X51
termination resistor
W
Z
orWB X51
X14
X51
WP X1
WB X41
2 Adapters: WA/2WA or WB/WAboth WA adapters installed in the option rack
WA X41
always installed beside the backpanel
WB adapter always installed beside the backpanel
Note: When installing a "2WA" adapter make suvethat link "W1" is inserted (see also Z1-15.1).
WA X51
or
Z X45
orX19WA X41
Schr
./Kö always installed on the left in the option rack
WB
WP
orWA
Z X21/X22/X31/X32/X41
X11
1 Adapter: WA or WB
Adapter: WP
CAN/XS
WBWB
or
3 Adapters: WA/2WA/WB
Z
X31
X51
Z X45
X21
X42
Z X19X41
X41
both WA adapters installed in the option rackWB adapter always installed beside the backpanel
Z X19 (2x WA)
WB X42X42
X1
X41WA X42
X42
X41
Cabinet rear side
or
X51 X51
WA X52WB X52
Z X45 (2x WA)or
WB X42X41
X42
WWA
termination resistor
X52
WA
orCAN/XS
2WA X51 (2x WA)
X52
2WA
X45
X41Z X19
4512 983 05741
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
2Z--2.0
RGDV programming
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05591_010
E1997 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(01.0)4512 983 05591
-Nam
e:
- DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV5
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
--Tube
:--Release
circuitnum
ber:
--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:--Syncm
asterpresent:
--Exposuresw
itchtype
:--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
--Conedensity
correction:
--Dosemeasurementinput:
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
--Exposureseries/Tomomovem
ent(Nobreakafterexposureend):
--Release
delay:
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
--Mounted
tomoextension:
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
--Usedforfluoroscopy
:--CTaddon
:--Disabletim
eoverride:
--Tube
powerfactor:
--kV
steps:
--mAssteps:
--mAsteps:
--tim
esteps:
--Densitysteps:
--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
--Underexposuredisplay:
--Tube
overload
protection:
Bucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomo1W
A\Tomotime[s]:
Tomomodesw
itch
Tomotim
e1:
Tomotim
e5:
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
Tomotim
e2:
Tomotim
e6:
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
Tomotim
e3:
Tomotim
e7:
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
Tomotim
e4:
Tomotim
e8:
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
(a/01.0) 2Z--2.2
RGDV programming: example 2
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05611_2Z--2_2_a010
E1997 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512 983 05611
-BuckyDiagnostTHwithBucky-C
ontroller
Nam
e:
-D76
:Exposure
Scopo/B
V-D
SI
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
D76
Scopo
D76
BV--DSI
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV5
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
11
--Tube
:1
11
12
2--Release
circuitnum
ber:
donotcare
donotcare
donotcare
donotcare
12
--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
nono
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
00
--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
00
--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
EZX22
EZX41
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
(Bucky
amplimat)
Scopo
amplimat
photosensor/
amplimatinput
--Exposureseries/Tomomovem
ent:
nono
nono
yes
yes
--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
none
none
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
none
none
none
none
1WB
1WB
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
none
none
none
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
001)
--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
001)
--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
001)
--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
001)
--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
001)
--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
001)
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
noyes
nono
nono
--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
noyes
yes
--CTaddon
:no
nono
nono
no--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
nono
--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.
1)Doseequiv.
1)Doseequiv.
1)Doseequiv.
1)Doseequiv.
1)Doseequiv.
1)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%12
%1)
12%
--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
00
--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
onon
Bucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomo1W
A\Tomotime[s]:
Tomomodesw
itch
--------
--------
Tomotim
e1:
--------
Tomotim
e5:
--------
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Tomotim
e2:
--------
Tomotim
e6:
--------
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[x]RGDV6[x]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e3:
--------
Tomotim
e7:
--------
ucy
GRGDV5[x]RGDV6[x]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e4:
--------
Tomotim
e8:
--------
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05631_2Z--2_4_a010
E1997 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
2Z--2.4
RGDV programming: example 4
(a/01.0)4512 983 05631
HDH:without/[with
tomotim
einput]
Nam
e:
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
Freecassette
USA
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV4
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
1--Tube
:1
11
11
--Release
circuitnum
ber:
11
3(4)
4--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
noyes
--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
0--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
0--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
none
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
(Bucky
amplimat)
(Bucky
amplimat)
--Exposureseries/Tom
omovem
ent:
noyes
nono
no--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
none
none
none
none
none
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
1WA
1WA
1WA
none
1WA
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
none
(1WA)
none
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
nono
(yes)
nono
no--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
nono
--CTaddon
:no
nono
nono
--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
no--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%12
%--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
noyes
yes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
onBucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomo1W
A\Tomotime[s]:
Tomomodesw
itch
dis(en)able
disable
Tomotim
e1:
0,8
Tomotim
e5:
0,1
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
RGDV1
none
Tomotim
e2:
3,2
Tomotim
e6:
0,1
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
RGDV3
none
Tomotim
e3:
0,8
Tomotim
e7:
0,1
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
none
none
Tomotim
e4:
3,2
Tomotim
e8:
0,1
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
RGDV2
none
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05641_2Z--2_5_a010
E1997 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
2Z--2.5
RGDV programming: example 5
(a/01.0)4512 983 05641
BuckyD
IAGNOSTwithBucky-C
ontroller
Nam
e:
TH/TH2/D
igitalDiagnost
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV5
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
--Tube
:1
11
1--Release
circuitnum
ber:
donotcare
donotcare
donotcare
donotcare
--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
(Bucky
amplimat)
--Exposureseries/Tom
omovem
ent:
nono
nono
--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
none
none
none
none
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
none
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
noyes
nono
--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
no--CTaddon
:no
nono
no--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
Bucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomotime
Tomomodesw
itch
--------
--------
Tomotim
e1:
--------
Tomotim
e5:
--------
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Tomotim
e2:
--------
Tomotim
e6:
--------
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e3:
--------
Tomotim
e7:
--------
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e4:
--------
Tomotim
e8:
--------
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05651_2Z--2_6_010
E2001 PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
2Z--2.6
RGDV programming: example 6
(01.0)4512 983 05651
BuckyD
IAGNOSTTS
Nam
e:
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV5
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
--Tube
:1
11
1--Release
circuitnum
ber:
11
2(1)
--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
no--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
--Exposureseries/Tom
omovem
ent:
noyes
nono
--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
none
none
none
none
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
1WA
1WA
1WA
none
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
1WA
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
noyes
nono
--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
no--CTaddon
:no
nono
no--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseeqiv.1
)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
noyes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
Bucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomotime
Tomomodesw
itch
enable
--------
Tomotim
e1:
--------
Tomotim
e5:
--------
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
RGDV1
--------
Tomotim
e2:
--------
Tomotim
e6:
--------
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
none
--------
Tomotim
e3:
--------
Tomotim
e7:
--------
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
none
--------
Tomotim
e4:
--------
Tomotim
e8:
--------
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
RGDV2
--------
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05671_2Z--2_8_010
E2001 PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
2Z--2.8
RGDV programming: example 8
(01.0)4512 983 05671
BuckyD
IAGNOSTTHanyversionwithBucky-C
ontroller
Nam
e:
Generotorequipped
with/w
ithoutdecadeadapt.unitWA
Aux.forMCS(only)=RGDV4combined
withfree
cassette
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
MCS
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV4
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
1--Tube
:1
11
11
--Release
circuitnum
ber:
11
11
1--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
0--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
0--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
EZX22
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
(Bucky
amplimat)
Bucky
amplimat
--Exposureseries/Tom
omovem
ent:
nono
nono
no--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
none
none
none
none
none
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
none
none
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
noyes
nono
no--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
nono
--CTaddon
:no
nono
nono
--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
no--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%12
%1)
--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
onBucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomotime
Tomomodesw
itch
--------
--------
Tomotim
e1:
--------
Tomotim
e5:
--------
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Tomotim
e2:
--------
Tomotim
e6:
--------
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e3:
--------
Tomotim
e7:
--------
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e4:
--------
Tomotim
e8:
--------
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05681_2Z--2_9_010
E2001 PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
2Z--2.9
RGDV programming: example 9
(01.0)4512 983 05681
BuckyD
IAGNOSTTHanyversion
Nam
e:
Generotorequipped
with/w
ithoutdecadeadapt.unitWA
Aux.forMCS(only)=anyofRGDV5...8
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
MCS
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV5
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
1--Tube
:1
11
11
--Release
circuitnum
ber:
11
11
1--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
yes
no--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
0--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
0--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
EZX22
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
(Bucky
amplimat)
Bucky
amplimat
--Exposureseries/Tom
omovem
ent:
nono
nono
no--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
none
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
none
none
none
none
none
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
none
none
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
noyes
nono
no--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
nono
--CTaddon
:no
nono
nono
--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
no--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%12
%1)
--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
onBucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomotime
Tomomodesw
itch
--------
--------
Tomotim
e1:
--------
Tomotim
e5:
--------
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Tomotim
e2:
--------
Tomotim
e6:
--------
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e3:
--------
Tomotim
e7:
--------
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e4:
--------
Tomotim
e8:
--------
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
A4
02--02--18
We
4512--983--05691_2Z--2_10_010
E2001 PHILIPS MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
2Z--2.10
RGDV programming: example 10
(01.0)4512 983 05691
BuckyD
IAGNOSTTHanyversion
Nam
e:
Generotorequipped
with/w
ithoutdecadeadapt.unitWA
Aux.forTraumaD
iagnost(only)=anyofRGDV5...8
Aux.RGDV1...4mustnotbeusedwithaBuckyTHstystemviaCAN
Bucky
Tomo
Bucky
wallstand
Freecassette
Trauma
DataSetA:
Desk:
RGDV1
RGDV2
RGDV3
RGDV4
RGDV5
RGDV6
RGDV7
RGDV8
--Room:
11
11
1--Tube
:1
11
12
--Release
circuitnum
ber:
11
11
1--Enablehandsw
itchatgeneratordesk
:yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Syncm
asterpresent:
yes
yes
yes
yes
no--Exposuresw
itchtype
:doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
doublestep
--Bucky
formatdensity
correction:
00
00
0--Conedensity
correction:
00
00
0--Dosemeasurementinput:
EZX21
none
/[EZX21]
EZX31
none
EZX22
--Dosemeasurementsensor:
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
Bucky
amplimat
(Bucky
amplimat)
Scopo
amplimat
--Exposureseries/Tom
omovem
ent:
nono
nono
no--Release
delay:
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
--Mounted
radiographicalcontroller:
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
Bucky
contr.1/
DigitalDiagnost
none
--Release
circuitadaptationunit:
none
none
none
none
none
--Mounted
tomoextension:
none
none
none
none
none
--MediumIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--MediumIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatkV
correction(doseequiv.steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatdensity
correction(6%steps):
00
00
0--SmallIIformatmAscorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0
DataSetB:
--Usedfortomo:
noyes
nono
no--Usedforfluoroscopy
:no
nono
noyes
--CTaddon
:no
nono
nono
--Disabletim
eoverride:
nono
nono
no--Tube
powerfactor:
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
--kV
steps:
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
Doseequiv.1)
--mAssteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--mAsteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--tim
esteps:
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)25
%1)
25%
1)
--Densitysteps:
12%
1)12
%1)
12%
1)12
%12
%1)
--Densitycorrection(6%steps):
00
00
0--Underexposuredisplay:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
--Tube
overload
protection:
onon
onon
onBucky/S
copo1W
B/D
ecadeBucky1(W
BX11):
Bucky/Tomo1W
A:DecadeBucky1/2
WAX11
WAX12
Bucky/Tomotime
Tomomodesw
itch
--------
--------
Tomotim
e1:
--------
Tomotim
e5:
--------
RGDV1[]RGDV2[]RGDV3[]
RGDV4[]
Bucky
RGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Tomotim
e2:
--------
Tomotim
e6:
--------
Bucky
RGDV:
[]
[]
[]
RGDV4[]
RGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e3:
--------
Tomotim
e7:
--------
ucy
GRGDV5[]RGDV6[]RGDV7[]
RGDV8[]
Bucky
RGDV
--------
--------
Tomotim
e4:
--------
Tomotim
e8:
--------
RGDV8[]
TomoRGDV--sw
itchrelated
--------
--------
Timesetting
forinputatW
AX21:1......8
ForWBX11
:9----10(ready)und1----2(formatsize
correction
contact)
Tomomodesw
itch:X
11:3SL_XG_TO/B
ucky
RGDV:X
11:1Format+:10Bucky
ready/Tom
oRGDV:X
11:1Format+:5Tomoready
switchrelatedX11:3---->
Bucky
--Tomoremotesw
itchoverRGDVs
1)=
hastobe
adjusteton
site
[]=
TDC
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
2Z--3E 1997 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(97.0)OPTIMUS CDOPTIMUS R/F4512 983 05721
Character display on the control desk
English German French Spanish
Possible PCdisplay
(code 850)
Inputat the PC
! ! ! ! !
# # £ £ #
$ $ $ $ $
% % % % %
& & & & &
’ ’ ’ ’ ’
( ( ( ( (
) ) ) ) )
* * * * *
+ + + + +
, , , , ,
-- -- -- -- --
. . . . .
/ / / / /
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9
: : : : :
; ; ; ; ;
< < < < <
= = = = =
> > > > >
? ? ? ? ?
@ § à § @
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C
D D D D D
E E E E E
F F F F F
G G G G G
H H H H H
I I I I I
J J J J J
K K K K K
L L L L L
M M M M M
N N N N N
O O O O O
P P P P P
Q Q Q Q Q
Character display on the control desk
English German French Spanish
Possible PCdisplay
(code 850)
Inputat the PC
R R R R R
S S S S S
T T T T T
U U U U U
V V V V V
W W W W W
X X X X X
Y Y Y Y Y
Z Z Z Z Z
[ Ä . i [
\ Ö ç Ñ \
] Ü § ¿ ]
^ ^ ^ ^ ^
_ _ _ _ _
’ ’ ’ ’ ’
a a a a a
b b b b b
c c c c c
d d d d d
e e e e e
f f f f f
g g g g g
h h h h h
i i i i i
j j j j j
k k k k k
l l l l l
m m m m m
n n n n n
o o o o o
p p p p p
q q q q q
r r r r r
s s s s s
t t t t t
u u u u u
v v v v v
w w w w w
x x x x x
y y y y y
z z z z z
ä é G Alt +123
¦ ö ù ñ ¦ Alt +124
ü é Ç Alt +125
~ ß -- ~ ~ Alt +126
Alt +127
á Alt +160
J J J J í Alt +161
ó Alt +162
Character display on the control desk
English German French Spanish
Possible PCdisplay
(code 850)
Inputat the PC
£ £ £ £ ú Alt +163
G G G G ñ Alt +164
§ § § § º Alt +167
¿ Alt +168
R Alt +169
Alt +170
½ Alt +171
Alt +172
Alt +173
Alt +174
Alt +175
_ _ _ _ Alt +176
Alt +177
2 2 2 2 Alt +178
À À À À Alt +192
Á Á Á Á Alt +193
    > Alt +194
à à à à Alt +195
Ä Ä Ä Ä Alt +196
Å Å Å Å Alt +197
Æ Æ Æ Æ ã Alt +198
Ç Ç Ç Ç Ã Alt +199
È È È È Alt +200
É É É É Alt +201
Ê Ê Ê Ê Alt +202
Ë Ë Ë Ë Alt +203
Ì Ì Ì Ì Alt +204
Í Í Í Í Alt +205
Î Î Î Î Alt +206
Ï Ï Ï Ï ¤ Alt +207
Alt +208
Ñ Ñ Ñ Ñ Ð Alt +209
Ò Ò Ò Ò Ê Alt +210
Ó Ó Ó Ó Ë Alt +211
Ô Ô Ô Ô È Alt +212
Õ Õ Õ Õ Alt +213
Ö Ö Ö Ö í Alt +214
î Alt +215
Ø Ø Ø Ø Ï Alt +216
Ù Ù Ù Ù Alt +217
Ú Ú Ú Ú Alt +218
Û Û Û Û Alt +219
Ü Ü Ü Ü Alt +220
Ý Ý Ý Ý ¦ Alt +221
ì Alt +222
ß ß ß ß Alt +223
à à à à Ó Alt +224
á á á á Alt +225
â â â â Ô Alt +226
Character display on the control desk
English German French Spanish
Possible PCdisplay
(code 850)
Inputat the PC
ã ã ã ã Ò Alt +227
ä ä ä ä õ Alt +228
å å å å Õ Alt +229
æ æ æ æ m Alt +230
ç ç ç ç Þ Alt +231
è è è è þ Alt +232
é é é é Ú Alt +233
ê ê ê ê Û Alt +234
ë ë ë ë Ù Alt +235
ì ì ì ì ý Alt +236
í í í í Ý Alt +237
î î î î G Alt +238
ï ï ï ï ’ Alt +239
G Alt +240
ñ ñ ñ ñ Alt +241
ò ò ò ò Alt +242
ó ó ó ó ¾ Alt +243
ô ô ô ô ¶ Alt +244
õ õ õ õ § Alt +245
ö ö ö ö Alt +246
, Alt +247
ø ø ø ø _ Alt +248
ù ù ù ù ¨ Alt +249
ú ú ú ú Alt +250
û û û û Alt +251
ü ü ü ü 3 Alt +252
ý ý ý ý 2 Alt +253
G Alt +254
Alt +255
List of characters
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
2Z--4
A402--02--18
E 1997 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
We
4512--983--05771_2Z--4_970
Data sets of chambers
OPTMIUS C (97.0)OPTMIUS R/F (97.0)OPTMIUS CD (97.0)4512 983 05771 (97.0)
Chamber 1 Chamber 2 Chamber 3 Chamber 4 Chamber 5
Film:
Screen:
Chamber:
Cassette:
Sys.corr.:
Corr. factor:
DataSet1
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
Film:
Screen:
Chamber:
Cassette:
Sys.corr.:
Corr. factor:
DataSet2
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
Film:
Screen:
Chamber:
Cassette:
Sys.corr.:
Corr. factor:
DataSet3
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
Film:
Screen:
Chamber:
Cassette:
Sys.corr.:
Corr. factor:
DataSet4
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
Film:
Screen:
Chamber:
Cassette:
Sys.corr.:
Corr. factor:
DataSet5
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
.....................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
......................
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
2Z--5(97.0)
A402--02--18
E 1997 Philips Medical SystemsALL RIGHTS RESERVED
We
4512--983--05731_2Z--5_970
Programming ofdevice interfaces
OPTIMUS CDOPTIMUS R/F4512 983 05731
Device interface 1
RGDV key 1 :RGDV key 2 :
RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............
RGDV key 1 :RGDV key 2 :
RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............
RGDV key 1 :RGDV key 2 :
RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............
RGDV key 1 :RGDV key 2 :
RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............
Device interface 2
RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............APR 7 ............ APR 8 ............
RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............APR 7 ............ APR 8 ............
RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............APR 7 ............ APR 8 ............
RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............APR 7 ............ APR 8 ............
Device interface 3
RGDV key 1 :RGDV key 2 :
RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............APR 7 ............ APR 8 ............
RGDV key 1 :RGDV key 2 :
RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............APR 7 ............ APR 8 ............
RGDV key 1 :RGDV key 2 :
RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............APR 7 ............ APR 8 ............
RGDV key 1 :RGDV key 2 :
RGDV ...................APR 1 ............ APR 2 ............APR 3 ............ APR 4 ............APR 5 ............ APR 6 ............APR 7 ............ APR 8 ............
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Setting-to-work OPTIMUS
(04.1) 4--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06011
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
4-1 (04.1)
2Z--10 (a/04.0) A3/A4 4512 983 028312Z--10 (a/02.0) A3/A3 4512 983 05701 (R/F)2Z--10 (a/02.0) A3/A3 4512 983 05831 (RAD)
Labeling
1. LabelsCheck the labelling according to the respective generator type.
See drawing 2Z-10.
All lables become visible by swiveling out the label bracket simply by hand and without any tool. The bracket islocated at the top left corner of the front side of the cabinet, visibly marked by an ”i” (for information) and text”Certified Component Labels Here”. If the label bracket is swiveled 90 degrees to the right the following labelsappear at its bottom side:
-- X-ray control: -- type designation-- serial No.-- name and address of manufacturer-- DHHS certification statement (if necessary)-- date of manufacture
-- X-ray H.V. generator: -- type designation-- serial No.-- name and address of manufacturer-- DHHS certification statement (if necessary)-- date of manufacture
-- Technical data label with UL / CSA classification (if necessary)
J
4512--983--06011
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
XOPTIMUS 50/65/80 OPTIMUS 30/40 single phase
OPTIMUS
Power Mains Adaption 800 VA
X
X
2Z-10(a/04.0) C Philips Medical Systems4512 983 02831
A3/A
4 0
4-05
-28
Sch
r.
Labelling
Logo Address
Type No.
IEC 60601-1 IEC 60601-2-32
Electr. data CE
UL / CSA
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
2Z-10c Philips Medical Systems
190...390VMains transformer
External
(option)
8
(a/02.0)
H.V. changeover switch
11
2112
4
22
222
20
8
4512 983 05701
D38CU
E
no. = s/nIdentification
93
4
H.V. generator
4
(option)
22
8
4
PHILIPS-nameplate
3
3
765
Z139
MastercardOperating desk(option)
Labelling
Schr
.02
-06-
19A3
/A3
Rating plate
142
CAUTION
20
22
cabinetGenerator
6types/ncode
5
CAUTION
CAUTION
Power distribution unit( PDU )
10
14 R
3~50/60 Hz400V 11A480V 9A
3~50/60Hz400V 10A 145A480V 8A 120A50
kW
65kW
80kW
ULCSA
ULCSA
ULCSA
3~50/60Hz400V 10A 190A480V 8A 160A
3~50/60Hz400V 10A 230A480V 8A 190A
50 kW
65kW
80kW
R- X-RAY EQUIPMENT -
CLASSIFIED BY UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRICAL FIRE,
SHOCK AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS ONLY. 641B
R- X-RAY EQUIPMENT -
CLASSIFIED BY UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRICAL FIRE,
SHOCK AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS ONLY. 641B
R- X-RAY EQUIPMENT -
CLASSIFIED BY UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRICAL FIRE,
SHOCK AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS ONLY. 641B
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstr. 24D-22335 Hamburg / Germany
- X-RAY CONTROL -type 9890 000 xxxxxs/n xx xxxx OPTIMUS
CERTIFICATION This product complies with thePerformance Standard under the Radiation Control for Healthand Safety Act of 1968, applicable at date of manufacture.
Manufactured: MONAT, JAHR
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstr. 24D-22335 Hamburg / Germany
- X-RAY HV GENERATOR -type 9890 000 xxxxxs/n xx xxxx OPTIMUS
CERTIFICATION This product complies with thePerformance Standard under the Radiation Control for Healthand Safety Act of 1968, applicable at date of manufacture.
Manufactured: MONAT, JAHR
5
6
13
Manufactured: MONAT, JAHR
This product complies with thePerformance Standard under the Radiation Control for Healthand Safety Act of 1968, applicable at date of manufacture.
CERTIFICATION
- X-RAY CONTROL -type 9890 000 0200xs/n xx xxxx OPTIMUS 50/65/80
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstr. 24D-22335 Hamburg / Germany
C US
7
7
7
1
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstrasse 24D-22335 Hamburg / Germany
HAZARD FOR LIVE AND /OR MOVING PARTS.ATTENTION WHEN SERVICING ENERGIZEDEQUIPMENT.OBSERVE THE SERVICE-MANUAL:
CAUTION
2
3
4
OPTIMUS 50
MADE IN GERMANY
1
1
OPTIMUS 65
OPTIMUS 80
311
13
type Produktnames/n Fabr. Nr.code Code Nr.
8
9 SN.
012310
CertifiedComponentLabels Here
WARNING: THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUSTO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
11
12
4512 104 7073.15
15
Operating desk
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
522
4
22
Z139
H.V. generator
(option)Operating desk
PHILIPS-nameplate
Mastercard
9
3
(a/02.0)
H.V. changeover switch
4
CAUTION
CAUTION
types /n
Schr
.
c ode
A3/A
3
4512 983 05831c
02-0
6-20
8
6
8
20
Rating plate
7
Labelling
2Z-10
222
22 12 1 24
5 6
20
Mains transformer190...390V
(option)
4
External
(option)
Generator
Identificationno. = s/n
cabinet
E
Philips Medical Systems
311
CAUTION
D38CU
10
14 R
3~50/60 Hz400V 11A480V 9A
3~50/60Hz400V 145A480V 120A50
kW
65kW
80kW
ULCSA
ULCSA
ULCSA
3~50/60Hz400V 190A480V 160A
3~50/60Hz400V 230A480V 190A
50 kW
65kW
80kW
R- X-RAY EQUIPMENT -
CLASSIFIED BY UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRICAL FIRE,
SHOCK AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS ONLY. 641B
R- X-RAY EQUIPMENT -
CLASSIFIED BY UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRICAL FIRE,
SHOCK AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS ONLY. 641B
R- X-RAY EQUIPMENT -
CLASSIFIED BY UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRICAL FIRE,
SHOCK AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS ONLY. 641B
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstr. 24D-22335 Hamburg / Germany
- X-RAY CONTROL -type 9890 000 xxxxxs/n xx xxxx OPTIMUS
CERTIFICATION This product complies with thePerformance Standard under the Radiation Control for Healthand Safety Act of 1968, applicable at date of manufacture.
Manufactured: MONAT, JAHR
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstr. 24D-22335 Hamburg / Germany
- X-RAY HV GENERATOR -type 9890 000 xxxxxs/n xx xxxx OPTIMUS
CERTIFICATION This product complies with thePerformance Standard under the Radiation Control for Healthand Safety Act of 1968, applicable at date of manufacture.
Manufactured: MONAT, JAHR
5
6
13
Manufactured: MONAT, JAHR
This product complies with thePerformance Standard under the Radiation Control for Healthand Safety Act of 1968, applicable at date of manufacture.
CERTIFICATION
- X-RAY CONTROL -type 9890 000 0200xs/n xx xxxx OPTIMUS 50/65/80
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstr. 24D-22335 Hamburg / Germany
C US
7
7
7
1
Philips Medical SystemsDMC GmbHRöntgenstrasse 24D-22335 Hamburg / Germany
HAZARD FOR LIVE AND /OR MOVING PARTS.ATTENTION WHEN SERVICING ENERGIZEDEQUIPMENT.OBSERVE THE SERVICE-MANUAL:
CAUTION
2
3
4
OPTIMUS 50
MADE IN GERMANY
1
1
OPTIMUS 65
OPTIMUS 80
311
13
type Produktnames/n Fabr. Nr.code Code Nr.
8
9 SN.
012310
CertifiedComponentLabels Here
WARNING: THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUSTO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
11
12
4512 104 7073.15
Operating desk
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
OPTIMUS Setting-to-work
(02.0) 4--1 2002 Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4512--983--06021
LIST OF PAGES AND MODULES MODULE CODE NUMBER:
4-1 (02.0)
Final installation work
1. Final installation workMount the side panels of the generator cabinet.
Take care that all cables inside the wall junction box are routed in closed loops without any kinks.Push the generator cabinet against the wall.
DWARNING
Block the two front wheels of the cabinet with the locking screws to guarantee that unauthorized persons
cannot accidentally touch parts of the generator which might be dangerous.
If necessary, level the cabinet with the locking screws.
Mount the front cover of the generator.
J
4512--983--06021
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips
Legend for cabling diagram
A3 0
3-05
-12
DP/
Kö
4512 983 06851 c Philips Medical Systems
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(03.0) Z-50
Cables
Connectors
10987654321
top decade plug D-SUB 25 pins D-SUB 15 pinsHeading symbols
S
VP
XA
VE/VT
UB
MEXLA
EC
UZ
6
7
8
5
MEX
4 mm
16 mm
7
8
10
25
6
5
2
2
22
12345
12345
MEX
D25 D25
D15 D15
D9 D9
D9m EZX43 D9fdd ( ) system CAN SZ1X2 plug elementcable functionfor entry of current cable numbertype of cabledesignation of plug
type of plug
cable to be laid
top decade
D-SUB 25 pins
MATE-N-LOCK 3 pins
D-SUB 9 pins
D-SUB 15 pins
FE functional earthing
earth connector
terminal number
screw junction
designation of connection block
max. wire diameter
PE protective earthing yellow/green wire
connection block
Cable (text) symbols
Connection blocks
Earthingdesignation of connection block
earth connection block
screw junction
terminal number
earthing strip
10 2
210
AE antiinterference earthingred wire
M3 M3
2
2T1T2T3
NN
L1
L2
L3
N
m=male, f=female
wcb
28
30
70
65
54
1543
40
15
43
32
15
38
12.6 mm9.6 mm
6.82 mm9.3 mm
Diameter
16.5 mm
8.4 mm7.8 mm7.3 mm9.6 mm7.4 mm6.2 mm9.2 mm8.0 mm
8.25 mmPE8O3-O3, 150 kVH.V.
6x2 x 0.75 mm screened8 x 0.75 mm screened8x2 x 0.22 mm screened + yl
16.7 mm
Description
10 x 0.5 mm screened10 x 0.5 mm12x2 x 0.22 mm screened5x2 x 0.22 mm screened2 x 0.8 mm3 x 1.3 mm screened + yl3+1 x 1.38 mm
dg
dm
PE16
dkdh
dedf
dddcdbda
Type
22
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0722 186 005..
(xx = length in m)
9806 402 6xx02
4512 100 664510722 997 072480722 215 33008
4512 100 66131
0722 215 510070722 215 620010722 300 01011
Codenumber
0722 215 020540722 207 03044
4512 104 0235. 2422 025 05039 2422 025 05038 2422 025 05456D-SUB 9 pins
15
38
32
2422 034 18334D-SUB 9 pins
male male male female
crimp pin female 2422 034 11632distance piece (M3, 11mm) 2422 034 20331
crimp pin male 2422 034 11636
FOL fibre optic link 2.9 mm xxxx xxx xxxxx
dn 2x2 x 0.22mm screened com.chan.
MD6
cable delivered
MINI-DIN 6 pinsMD6
5.6 mm 0722 215 290062
2
MINI-DIN 6 pin
D37 D-SUB 37 pinsD37
A68 AMPLIMITE 050 68 pinsA68
28
23
28
37
15
50
12
4512 104female
gender changer 9pins4512 104male
30
control deskcabinet generator
collimatorwcb generatorbucky table for bucky DIAGNOST TH,Segment control unit for bucky DIAGNOST VR or
ceiling crane longitudinal carriage (bucky DIAGNOST CS)ceiling crane transverse carriage (bucky DIAGNOST CS)vertical DIAGNOSTwcb vertical DIAGNOST
X-ray tubewall connection box
connection block incl.wall connection box4512 103 75384
MATE-N_LOCK 12 pins2422 025 029083x4 male
MATE-N_LOCK 3 pins
1x3 male2422 025 02991
3x3 male2422 034 16589MATE-N_LOCK 9 pins
2422 034 162533x2 male
MATE-N_LOCK 6 pins
crimp pin female2422 015 14048
crimp pin male2422 034 17788
9 x 10mm
5 x 25mm
gender changer 9 pins9m9f
Stand of duo DIAGNOST/easy DIAGNOST
40.0 mm2x35 mmdo xxxx xxx xxxxx2
(30 width) (25 width) (20 width)
11BNC-connector
2432 020 003692432 020 00273
29
11BNC-connector2432 020 00272
24.5
14.5
14.5
FS bucky DIAGNOST Floor Stand
UA column (bucky DIAGNOST Floor Stand)SA film plane
WS wallstand
Philips
Phili
ps M
edic
al S
yste
ms:
D
EC
LA
SS
IFIE
D C
usto
mer
Ser
vice
Inte
llect
ual P
rope
rty
Philips